<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Jonas</id>
	<title>WICE Wiki v2.95 - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Jonas"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php/Special:Contributions/Jonas"/>
	<updated>2026-04-05T18:29:18Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.44.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=4026</id>
		<title>The Portal Administrator View</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=4026"/>
		<updated>2025-09-02T12:59:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Upload a Vehicle Import File */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to what a normal user can do, an administrator can create and modify users and stop tasks for any task. &lt;br /&gt;
These new functions will be explained in the next three chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We will start with the &#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039; tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the &#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
Lastly is the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; tab with five sub tabs consisting of: the &#039;&#039;Connect&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Archives&#039;&#039; tab the&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;GDS/SDDB files&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Resource Groups&#039;&#039; tab and the &#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Tasks Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32a.png|thumb|Stopping Running Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32b.png|thumb|Force Stop Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator the administrator can search and view any user&#039;s task. Also, it has one more button present. An administrator can send a &#039;&#039;Force Stop&#039;&#039; command to any WCU.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Figure &amp;quot;Stopping Running Task&amp;quot; shows the &amp;quot;Stop assigment&amp;quot; button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running task. When a running task is stopped, it changes state to &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot;. This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; in the portal view. The administrator view&#039;s &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot; button, which can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot;, forces a &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot; task into &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a portal of version 2.60 and forward, it is also possible for an administrator to remove all resultfiles for a selected task using the corresponding context menu option. When doing so, a confirmation dialog pops up to ensure that it is in fact the intended choice. Note that this option is disabled if multiple tasks are selected or if the selected task does not have any result files attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Vehicles Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can do quite a lot of things in this view, an illustration of which is presented in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Vehicles]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vehicles panel adm buttons Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-06-17.png|left|thumb|800x800px|The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The New WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog presented in in Figure &amp;quot;The Add New WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration34.png|frame|left|The Add New WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a WCU simply mark it in the table and press the button called &amp;quot;Edit WCU&amp;quot;. This results in a dialog where the fields differ depending on editability. For one selected WCU these are the comment, name, whether it is active or not, the labels for the WCU or if it requires approved assignments. However, if the WCU has tasks which have status pending, running, warning or error (or corresponding partial statuses), the active option is disabled. This is also true if the WCU is connected to a vehicle or if it is included in a resource group. By checking &amp;quot;Require approved assignments&amp;quot; you can only add assignments that have been reviewed and then approved by the reviewers. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-wcu-2.87.png|alt=Edit a WCU|thumb|Edit a WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the selected WCU is a resource group the dialog will appear as presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. The difference here is the &amp;quot;Apply label to resource group&#039;s WCUs&amp;quot;checkbox. When this option is selected the labels selected in the &amp;quot;Manage labels&amp;quot;-selector are also added to the WCUs included in the resource group. It is, though, not possible to remove labels from the resource group&#039;s WCUs using this checkbox. To do so use instead the context menu options for label management. [[File:Edit wcu.png|thumb|Edit a Resource Group WCU Dialog|left]]It is also possible to edit multiple WCUs simultaneously. If several WCUs are selected the dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Multiple WCUs&amp;quot; appear. This is only possible for the fields &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Active&amp;quot; and these are enabled using the corresponding checkbox to the right. If one of the selected WCUs fulfill the conditions presented above for the disablement of the Active-option, it will not be possible to select the corresponding checkbox. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit wcu multiple.png|thumb|Edit Multiple WCUs|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit the WCU Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; to open up the window in Figures &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Modules&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: IO&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;150&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config1.png|Edit Configuration: Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config2.png|Edit Configuration: Connection.&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config3.png|Edit Configuration: WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
File:Power-management.png|alt=Power Management|Edit configuration: Power Management&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config5.png|Edit Configuration: Upload.&lt;br /&gt;
File:NewOiGui.png|Edit configuration: IO&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu extra bundles.png|Edit Configuration: Extra bundles.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Modules====&lt;br /&gt;
The set of checkboxes for the different modules that are present are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Disabling modules will speed up the boot process of the WCU (but will make the corresponding functionality unavailable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit &amp;quot;Car type&amp;quot;, click on the field where the car type is displayed to open the &amp;quot;Edit car&amp;quot; dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last three checkboxes, &amp;quot;Run IDC at boot&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Run IDC at ignition off&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable VIN reader&amp;quot; are pretty much self-explanatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connection====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;  and the tab content for the WLAN part is described [[WCU as WiFi Access Point|here.]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on site,i.e. is enabled, and if the WCU software is at least 2.90.0, an option of configuring a [https://www.wireguard.com/ WireGuard] VPN is available and described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Remote Login =====&lt;br /&gt;
Determines if it is possible to connect to the WCU remotely - possibly configured with an active time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To enable remote login - select &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To enabletime limit - select &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot; and enter a value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login add.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Add]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable remote login - deselect &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable time limit - deselect &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the time limit - select &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; and enter a new value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login edit.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WCU====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Unit ID&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The automatically generated unique WCU identifier. The ID is immutable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform subtype&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform subtype.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU software version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the currently installed WCU software version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred WCU software&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed. When updating to a new version, the configuration dialog will update itself immediately to reflect what is available in the new version, hence accordingly also when downgrading. This means that new settings regarding the WCU&#039;s modules will also be upgraded which makes it possible to edit the modules according to the new version. In addition, when creating new tasks, validation will be carried out to the new version and hence you will not have to wait for the WCU to be updated to the new version to use new features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Perform reset on update&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;MX4 firmware version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The currently installed MX4 firmware version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred MX4 firmware&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The new preferred MX4 firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and possibly subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in &amp;quot;Set root password&amp;quot; and save the configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Local Scheduling Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a WCU of version 2.53 or higher it is possible to configure a local time zone for the WCU using the option &amp;quot;Local scheduling time zone&amp;quot; presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;. This field consist of a drop down menu displaying the selectable time zones, which are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Universal&lt;br /&gt;
* Africa/Cairo&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Anchorage&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Caracas&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Chicago&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Denver&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Los_Angeles&lt;br /&gt;
* America/New_York&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Sao_Paulo&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dhaka&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Hong_Kong&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Karachi&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Tokyo&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Adelaide&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Brisbane&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Darwin&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Sydney&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/London&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Moscow&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The zone defined here will be enforced selecting &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot; when scheduling a task, see description [[Creating a Task#CAN-recorder#Scheduling|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Blink Controller&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version later than or equal to 2.54 it is possible to configure the blink controller for the WCU diods, which can be set to blink in different patterns to represent different WCU states. Selecting &amp;quot;Legacy&amp;quot; in the corresponding drop down menu will result in the WCU controlling the diods and the &amp;quot;DioIPD&amp;quot;-option means that the DioIPD will controll them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable NTP Server&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enable or disable the NTP server by the use of a checkbox named thereafter for WCUs of version 2.60 or later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wcu certficate three files.png|thumb|Files for Certificate Update]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCU is version 2.52 or later you have an opportunity to update the WCU&#039;s certificate and related files. If the conditions mentioned are met you will see a checkbox saying &amp;quot;Update certificate related files&amp;quot;, see Figure &amp;quot;Files for Certificate Update&amp;quot;. When checking the checkbox, an additional three fields are revealed. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Certificate file, choose a certificate file to upload which is in PEM format.&lt;br /&gt;
* Private key file, choose a private key to upload in PEM format as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Password file, choose a file with the password to the private key. The file should be plain text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must supply all three files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to see what certificate is installed on the WCU at any time, there is text field called &amp;quot;Current fingerprint&amp;quot;. If you have recently updated a WCUs certificate, you can by hovering over the field also see if the WCU is using the latest certificate. If this the case a message saying &amp;quot;Using latest certificate&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Renew WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to renew a WCU&#039;s certificate by selecting the checkbox &amp;quot;Renew certificate&amp;quot;. Doing so will automatically issue a new certificate when the configuration is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenewCertificate.png|thumb|Renew Certificate]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enable PTP ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ptp-setting-wcu.png|alt=PTP settings in the WCU configuration|thumb|PTP settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.81.0 of the WCU software there support for starting a PTP daemon on the WCU in order to synchronize time between units connected to the WCU. The protocol is designed to attain a higher accuracy than when using NTP. When you enable the setting you must also select to which interface on the WCU the daemon should listen on. You can see what it looks like in the illustration on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Perodic Wake-up]]&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot; and the tab content is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Power mode” has two settings: &amp;quot;Sleep&amp;quot;, Deep sleep&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Cut-off&amp;quot;. In cut-off mode, the WCU is not woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In sleep mode, some more settings are visible which also can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;External cut-off&amp;quot;, only available for the COMMITTO platform. In addition, you may enable the WCU&#039;s wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake-up cycle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to &amp;quot;deep sleep&amp;quot; for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode &amp;quot;sleep&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example: &#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).&lt;br /&gt;
This example is illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Perodic Wake-up&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible wake on a specific CAN frame ID. The settings are the same is for the canrecorder task. There it is possible to select one specific frame or several by separating them by “,”. It is also possible to select a range between frames by using “-”. The value can either be decimal or hexadecimal. A example of a filter: “1, 0x12-0xFF”&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--You can select the MCD-Hub to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;MCD-hub cut-off&amp;quot;. In addition, you may enable the WCUs wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time” which indicates for how long I should be awake before going to sleep. The committo platform has some limits on the two settings and those are: minimum time to set between wake-ups is 10 minutes and the maximum time is 12 hours.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WMU&#039;s Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
If your Portal has [[WMU | WMU&#039;s]] enabled and you have added WMU&#039;s to the WCU Configuration in the [[I/O_configurations#Add_WMU(s) | I/O Configurations tab]], then the Power Management controls &amp;quot;Power Mode&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Wake on CAN&amp;quot; are present for each WMU with a tab of their own. These tabs are found at the top of the dialog window next to the WCU&#039;s Power Management tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Upload====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;upload tab wcu configuration&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot; and the tab content is described in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Mobile upload limit&lt;br /&gt;
| Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Post run grace timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the portal, if the ignition is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Erase error code&lt;br /&gt;
| If turned on the error codes in the vehicle will be reset.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at boot&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the WCU boots up.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at ignition off&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the ignition of the vehicle is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Upload periodically&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Uploads data every 10 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====IO====&lt;br /&gt;
Version &amp;gt;= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Extra bundles====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From portal version 2.47 and if the WCU is running 2.47 (or is about to be upgraded to 2.47) there is a new tab &amp;quot;Extra bundles&amp;quot; in the WCU configuration window, see Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. In the tab, it is possible to select additional software to be installed on the WCU. The installation will start as soon as the WCU fetches the updated configuraton. This tab is only enabled if the current WCU is an MX4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit Vehicle Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration37.png|thumb|200px|right|Edit One Vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration38.png|thumb|200px|right|Edit Several Vehicles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Vehicle” button. The dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Edit One Vehicle&amp;quot; opens up.The one entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the portal to be able to translate Diagnostic Trouble Codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic trouble codes read out might be translated incorrectly or (more probable), not at all. It is also important to select the right type of vehicle using “Vehicle type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the vehicle. If the selected vehicle is connected to a WCU in a resource group, strict or not, this option is disabled. To enable it it either has to be disconnected from the WCU or the WCU must be excluded from its resource group. The “Active” check box controls whether the vehicle should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A vehicle can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated vehicle you must actively select to view inactivated vehicles. However, if the vehicle is connected to a WCU this option will be disabled from editing. In order to deactivate such a vehicle you need to first disconnect it from the WCU. It is possible to choose not to update history vehicles with the provided changes. This option should only used in specific cases and with a well grounded reason. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to update several vehicles at once by selecting multiple vehicles and then press the “Edit Vehicle” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes, except for the VIN and plate number, for all the selected vehicles at once. This is achieved using the extended dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;. The options which are to be edited for all vehicles must be selected using the corresponding checkbox. If not, the option is disabled, as for instance the &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot;-option in the &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;-figure.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add Vehicle Dialog ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add-car-dialog.png|alt=add car dialog|thumb|Add Vehicle dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Save car response dialog.png|thumb|Response dialog when creating a new vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
Usually you do not have to create vehicles manually, they are created automatically by the WCU if they are not found. It is possible, however, to create a vehicle manually using the portal by pressing the button &amp;quot;Add Vehicle&amp;quot; in the vehicles panel. By doing so you will be presented with the dialog found on the right. Here you can set a number of attributes. Important to remember is that the field VIN is mandatory and must be unique among all vehicles registered on the portal. From version 2.57 of the portal the checkbox &amp;quot;Generate unique VIN&amp;quot; is present to the right of the input field VIN. By checking that box a unique VIN will be generated once you save the vehicle. The name consists of a prefix, which is centrally preconfigured, and a monotonically increasing integer number. After pressing save you will be presented with the following dialog (in the right below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you have the opportunity to inspect the generated VIN and your other settings. You can either select to dismiss the dialog or go to the result which means that the newly created vehicle will be presented in the table in the vehicles panel.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Upload a Vehicle Import File===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using &#039;&#039;Upload Vehicle Import File&#039;&#039;,&lt;br /&gt;
you can import vehicles using a [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comma-separated_values csv file].&lt;br /&gt;
This can be used both to create&lt;br /&gt;
new vehicles&lt;br /&gt;
and optionally to update existing ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The header is a bit special:&lt;br /&gt;
a set of columns are treated specially,&lt;br /&gt;
and the rest are added to the resulting vehicle as labels.&lt;br /&gt;
The special column headers are listed below,&lt;br /&gt;
but are also the same fields you find in the [[#Add Vehicle Dialog|Add Vehicle dialog]].&lt;br /&gt;
These are case-insensitive&lt;br /&gt;
and the order of them does not matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned,&lt;br /&gt;
remaining columns are interpreted as labels&lt;br /&gt;
and are added to all imported vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
New labels are created as valued labels,&lt;br /&gt;
and are given an empty value for rows with empty data.&lt;br /&gt;
If there is data present,&lt;br /&gt;
it will be saved as the value of the label for the corresponding vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
If the label already exists&lt;br /&gt;
but is not a valued label,&lt;br /&gt;
the column &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Special header values:&lt;br /&gt;
; VIN&lt;br /&gt;
: VIN specifying what car the row refers to. &#039;&#039;&#039;Required&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; regNr&lt;br /&gt;
: License plate number.&lt;br /&gt;
; description&lt;br /&gt;
; project&lt;br /&gt;
; protoNumber&lt;br /&gt;
; tsu&lt;br /&gt;
; series&lt;br /&gt;
; profile&lt;br /&gt;
: Name of [[Vehicle Profiles|Vehicle Profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
; diagnostics&lt;br /&gt;
: Name of [[Vehicle Profiles#Manage Description files|Diagnostics DB]] file  &lt;br /&gt;
Full header for copying: &#039;&#039;VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series,profile,diagnostics&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Show or export SIM card ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting &amp;quot;Show info&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIM card ID&#039;s for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button &amp;quot;Export SIM card info&amp;quot; located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload WCU file ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU attributes &#039;WCU Name&#039; and &#039;WCU Comment&#039; can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the &amp;quot;Upload WCU File&amp;quot; button to open up the import file to upload dialog. Remember that this function is only for updating already existing WCUs, WCUs not existing cannot be added using this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The uploaded file has the following requirements:&lt;br /&gt;
* The file must have two mandatory columns with the names &#039;WCU ID&#039; and &#039;WCU Name&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Furthermore, an optional column named &#039;Comments&#039; can be added. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be in said order.&lt;br /&gt;
* The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.&lt;br /&gt;
If there is a &#039;Comment&#039; column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload vehicle pins file Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-22-22.png|thumb|Upload of a vehicle pin code file]]&lt;br /&gt;
ECU pin codes can be specific for a vehicle. This makes it possible to [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice284/index.php/Creating_a_Task#SWDL create an SWDL assignment] for multiple vehicles in one go. In order for this to work you must first prepare all such vehicles by uploading a file describing the different pin codes. When using the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; multiple vehicles can be described in one file. The format of such a file is  row based where each row should be &#039;&#039;&#039;vin;ecu;pin&#039;&#039;&#039;. The ecu field is the hexadecimal address the ECU. When pressing the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; you will be presented with the dialog found to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Context-vehicle-pin-code-file.png|thumb|The context menu choice for uploading a ECU pin code file for a single vehicle.]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is also on option available with a context menu (right click a row) where a singe vehicle is targeted. The format of the file is the same except that no vin should be in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Shelve and Unshelve a WCU}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resource Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100&lt;br /&gt;
WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration&lt;br /&gt;
will be saved to all WCUs in one go. Resource groups are created in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Resource group|Resource groups panel]], described further below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUtoResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding Resources to Resource Group|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add a resource to a resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested in adding to a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are satisfied with your selection, press the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group”. Pressing this button will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two check boxes requires a deeper discussion. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU is registered on the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured the same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCU software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes pre-configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well. In order to do so, it is required that you also update the WCU-configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave the &amp;quot;Update WCU configuration&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Update module configuration&amp;quot; unchecked, that selection of only in this instant. If you later change the resource group configuration (or module configuration), that change will be applied to all resources in the group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMovingResourceToResourceGroup.png|thumb|Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group|right]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moving a resource between resource groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
In this same dialog it is also possible to move WCUs between resource groups. Just as with adding a WCU to a resource group, select the WCU(s) you wish to move and press the &amp;quot;Add WCU(s) to resource group&amp;quot; button. If a WCU already belongs to a resource group, that resource group is listed in the grid alongside the WCU. Select the desired resource group you wish to move the WCU to, in the group box and press the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button. An information dialog will pop up, informing you that a WCU will move from one resource group to another. Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to confirm the WCU moving to a new resource group or press &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; to return to the previous dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUToStrictResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding/Moving WCU to Strict Resource Group.|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Requirements for moving or adding a resource to a strict resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
When adding or moving WCUs to a strict resource group, it is required that the WCU shares the same platform type (and platform subtype, should one exist) and that a car is connected to the WCU (see [[Strict resource group|strict resource groups]]). Furthermore, updating the WCU-configuration and the module configurations are mandatory and, as such, these options are set and not able to be changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modules for the WCU==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-09-10 15-34-09.png|alt=Tool configurations.|thumb|687x687px|Selecting Tool Configurations]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each WCU supports a number of modules. The modules are software components realizing specific functions, such as a measurement tool, a data source or software component. Some modules correspond to external measurement devices connected to the WCU, whereas other are built-in. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The set of currently available modules are:&lt;br /&gt;
# Area5&lt;br /&gt;
# Audio&lt;br /&gt;
# Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
# Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
# DLT&lt;br /&gt;
# DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
# ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
# Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS&lt;br /&gt;
# IDC&lt;br /&gt;
# IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
# LPD&lt;br /&gt;
# M-log&lt;br /&gt;
# MCD-Hub (deprecated)&lt;br /&gt;
# MQTT&lt;br /&gt;
# Rapid Prototyping (RP)&lt;br /&gt;
# Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
# Smart Eye&lt;br /&gt;
# Soft-Hub&lt;br /&gt;
# State of Health (SoH)&lt;br /&gt;
# Software Download (SWDL)&lt;br /&gt;
# Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
# Video&lt;br /&gt;
# Vinreader&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To deal with each module&#039;s configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot; in [[#The Vehicles Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Selecting Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there are a set of tools present where each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Show the Signal Reader settings by selecting the Signal Reader stack and select the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorder settings and so forth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Figure &amp;quot;Handling Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit description”. To reload the set of available tools  press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below each tool configuration there messages are presented to indicate the module status. The different types of which are presented in Figure &amp;quot;Module Status Indicators&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules no settings changed.png|Module Status Indicators&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings not saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules tool upgrade pending.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a module is selected, or reloaded, it will say &amp;quot;No settings saved&amp;quot;. In this mode the save-button is disabled and it will not be enabled until one of the settings is edited. Then the message &amp;quot;Settings not saved&amp;quot; appears until the save button is pressed. When the configuration is successfully saved, the status is updated to &amp;quot;Settings saved&amp;quot; and the Save-button is once again disabled. In addition, if there is a pending upgrade of the tool, this also will be indicated below the configuration panel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-09 10-54-55.png|thumb|Module status with information on when it was changed and by whom]]&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the module status indicator above, a date and user will show when the configuration was changed and by whom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Arcos Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArcosNewModule.png|alt=Arcos-module|thumb|Arcos-module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.71 of the portal, Arcos tasks can be created and these are the configurations variables that can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
* Username&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Frontend number&lt;br /&gt;
*Current firmware&lt;br /&gt;
*Desired firmware&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Debug level]]&lt;br /&gt;
When configuring the module on a resource group level the username and password will be set on all resources in the resource group. The frontend number however, will not be updated on all the resources but rather retain the individual settings made on each resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; field to show the WCU software version needs to be 2.85.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Area5 Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.61 of the portal, it is possible to create Area5 tasks. The Area5 tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the Area5 tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Audio Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module can be configured both regarding &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. The recording settings refer to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring settings refer to the parameters used for monitoring live audio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available recording settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Device&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to internal or USB, where default is internal&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to either 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo), default is 2&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to 48000, 44100, 16000 or 8000. Default is 48000. The unit is Hz.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Recording volume&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to a value between 0 and 100, where default is 95.&lt;br /&gt;
The available monitoring settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo). Default is 1.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, LPCM, GSM or G.711. Default is LPCM (Linear PCM 16 bits per sample, 16 kHz).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is the address to where the audio is sent for live monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. In order to monitor audio live for an audio task, the module must be enabled for monitoring. If the task is enabled for monitoring but the module is not, no audio can be monitored live. Default is disabled.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to have four audio sources simultaneously. To add a new source, simply press the button &amp;quot;Add audio source&amp;quot; and the corresponding settings will appear in a new tab. If there already is an audio source with device set to internal, the new device will have default device USB. However, if there is no previous device set to internal, this will be the default option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Blue piraT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.44 of the portal it is possible to create blue piraT tasks. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Canrecorder Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The configurable settings for the Canrecorder module can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Canrecorder module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules Canrecorder.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Canrecorder module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the aforementioned figure, it is clear that this panel can be used to edit the speed on both the high- and low-speed CAN-buses. It is also possible to set the date for which the update is valid, the canrecorder version and the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DLT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version earlier than 2.72.0 the DLT module have two DLT-specific settings, one for the daemon address and one for the daemon port. Have a look [[DLT Module|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version 2.72.0 or later, the daemon addresses and ports (several daemons are supported from this version) are instead specified when creating a [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) task]]. The only thing specified in the module is the debug level - the level of logging from the WCU regarding its handling of this task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DoIP Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In figure &amp;quot;Settings for the DoIP module&amp;quot; the configuration for the DoIP module is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy address:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy address for the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy port:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy port.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ID:&#039;&#039;&#039; The ID of the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Active session:&#039;&#039;&#039; Checkbox to let the DoIP module start announcing an ongoing synchronous diagnostic session. This is typically done by setting a LED on the WCU connected to the vehicle, signaling that a synchronous diagnostic session is ongoing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proxy address should usually be set to the localhost IP address 127.0.0.1 for technical reasons (it will be tunneled) and the proxy port number should usually be 6757. The ID is a textual string that identifies a particular user group that will gain access to the WCUs by configuring the client interface system with the same identifier. (This configuration is done at doipc install time.) All WCUs configured with the same ID will be reachable through the same client system interface. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules DoIP.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the DoIP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the ETAS Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the ETAS module&amp;quot; the configuration panel for the ETAS module is presented. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules ETAS.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the ETAS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to change the username and password as well as the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Ethernet capture module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-34-02.png|thumb|Settings for the Ethernet capture module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the File fetcher module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is [[debug level]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the GPS Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-36-42.png|thumb|Settings for the GPS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are four settings involved:&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IDC Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module can be configured with which CAN bus to communicate with the vehicle. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-10-19 10-17-38.png|none|thumb|Settings for the IDC module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.68.0 another option also exists where the file output format can be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IPEmotion RT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module can be configured with SFTP port, username and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the LPD Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module can be configured with a list of usernames. Each &amp;quot;Username&amp;quot; field represents one username in that list. Use the button next to the field to add another username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the M-log Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-21 16-11-28.png|alt=Settings for the M-log module|left|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the M-log module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.75.0 of the M-log module there are two more fields present. They are &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; which is the last known firmware for the M-log logger. &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; consists of a drop-down list a out-of-band firmware files present on the portal. Select one the files and the WCU will try to apply the firmware upgrade to the M-log as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The MCD-Hub module is deprecated and should not be used anymore. The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub. The other two configuration settings  are the preferred firmware version and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MQTT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The available settings for the MQTT Module is presented in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the MQTT module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules MQTT.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the MQTT module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to define an alternative host for the MQTT broker. Default is, as displayed in the illustration, localhost. Here you can also change the debug level for the module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the RP Module===&lt;br /&gt;
For this module it is only possible to configure modify the debug level, see Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration44.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the RP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on how to use the RP module is found in the [[WICE RP Manual]] and the [[WICE RP How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Signal Reader Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal-reader-module-2.88.png|alt=Settings for the Signal Reader module|thumb|318x318px|Settings for the Signal Reader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time. For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor” illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Signal Reader module&amp;quot;. The monitoring can either be set as asynchronous or synchronous. In the former case, there is a regular signal communication with the portal and in the latter case with a specified destination port. For the synchronous case it is also possible to specify which transport protocol to use: TCP or UDP. The monitoring rate for both cases is set using the &amp;quot;Interval&amp;quot; field, where the default is once per second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also here it is possible to define the debug level. Further, the module settings include selecting whether or not the MDF files are to be written upon recorder stop and the version of the generated MDF file. In the sampling section there are two main choices; whether or not to record samples on change and enabling/disabling of piecewise linear approximation (PLA). If samples are to be recorded on change, it is possible to also choose to include one sample before the change. With the choice of PLA comes the option of defining the error percentage for the signal range and the maximum segment length in number of samples.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you can select whether to aggregate ReadDataByIdentifier (service 22) diagnostic requests and which channel that should be used as the default diagnostics channel. Default interface can be CAN or DoIP and will affect the assignment that has the interface &amp;quot;Default Channel&amp;quot; selected and also the DREC. It is also possible to enter appropriate values for the diagnostics timeout. The timeout values determine how long time to wait for diagnostic responses before assuming that there are none. Typically, the timeout for sequence file diagnostics is set to a higher value due to the fact that it doesn&#039;t negatively impact the update frequency of active (diagnostics) signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible to select the MDF4 format when logging frames.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the SmartEye Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The configuration for this module is identical to that of the RP module, depicted in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Soft-Hub===&lt;br /&gt;
As for the RP and Smarteye module, its only editable parameter is the debug level using a panel as displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the State of Health Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The state of health module has the same settings as the IDC module above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Software Download Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SWDL module has the same settings as the IDC module above apart from one difference highlighted in red in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Software Download Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules SWDL.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Software Download Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version 2.53 and forward it is possible to allow updates to be performed without manual interaction by checking the high-lighted checkbox. If this option is chosen, the updates will instead be performed as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Uptime Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running and its configuration is set using the panel displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Uptime Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration43.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Uptime Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” checkbox. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Video Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
A description of how to configure the video module can be found here. An explanation of the module in more general terms is found in the [[WICE video]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The video module can be configured both regarding the recording and the monitoring. The recording parameters refers to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring parameters refer to the live video that is streamed from the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when recording video clips to disc. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8. (Note that the video that is uploaded to the portal is typically transcoded to MPEG-4 format, and codec only refers to the recording phase in the WCU.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip size&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the size in seconds or bytes of clips recorded on the WCU. The clips are subsequently concatenated on the Portal, if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip unit&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the unit for the clip size setting (bytes or seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;, which enables or disables monitoring of video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when streaming monitored video. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the IP address to which monitored video is transmitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a setting for rotating the video, to be used if the camera is installed upside-down or at a 45 degree angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Vinreader Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SettingForTheVinReaderModule.png|alt=Settings for the Vinreader module|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the Vinreader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The method of reading a vehicle&#039;s VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) can be set to &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA29&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;OBD2&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA11, BP, TEA2+, UDS, DoIP&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;, SOVD&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;FIXED&#039;&#039;&#039;. The preferred setting for this is OBD2, whereby a standardized OBD-II diagnostic service is used to read out the VIN. SPA29 and SPA11 refers to using CAN diagnostic requests using either 29 bit or 11 bit SPA addressing respectively. The CAN channel (on the WCU) is selected in &#039;Default CAN channel&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the setting FIXED is used, the VIN will not be read out from the vehicle using a diagnostic service, but rather a preset value entered in the item named &#039;Fixed VIN&#039; is used. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-09-21.png|alt=Vehicle ID method type|thumb|Vehicle ID method type]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-55-55.png|alt=No identifying label selected|thumb|No identifying label selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Skärmavbild 2019-12-18 kl. 15.17.58.png|thumb|Audio module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;Save VIN&#039; is a checkbox for save vin. As default the box is checked which means that it will save the VIN number if the WCU can successfully read it. If the &#039;Save VIN&#039; is unchecked then the WCU will try to read the VIN number every time it boots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently two ways of identifying a vehicle, either by reading the VIN or the chassis number. The selection is shown in Illustration &#039;Vehicle ID method type&#039; to the right. When using &#039;Chassis NO&#039; as identification type you must select which valued label to use for this mechanism. If no such label has been selected, you will see the the text &#039;No label selected in backend&#039; to the right of the selected type, see Illustration &#039;No identifying label selected&#039; on the right. To select which label to use, head over to the [[Labels#Administer labels|label administration tab]] to make the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.94.0, a new field called &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; has been introduced. This field offers three options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Diagnostics Test Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;External Prolonged Data Collection Equipment&#039;&#039;&#039; with a value of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0F80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Other&#039;&#039;&#039;, which allows users to enter a custom value&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard range for custom values is between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0E80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0x0FFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, but users may also enter a value outside this range if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; For the &#039;&#039;Tester Address&#039;&#039; field to appear in this module, the vehicle&#039;s VIN must be set to &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA29&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Administration Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups”, “Users”, &amp;quot;Labels&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;WCU Status&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Key Figures&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Connect Car to WCU Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To archive which vehicle a specific WCU was in at the time a task was run can be done by connecting a vehicle to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching vehicles, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the vehicle you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To connect a WCU with a vehicle you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the vehicle in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and vehicle are connected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; button located between the two grids.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.&lt;br /&gt;
See Figure &amp;quot;Connect Cars to WCU&amp;quot; for an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 45.png|thumb|frame|left|600px|Connect Cars to WCU]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Resource Groups Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;Resource Group Tab&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resource-groups-administration.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Resource Group Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Add and Remove Resource Groups====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateNewResourceGroup.png|thumb|Add Resource Group Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Here you can type the name for the new resource group, set the resource group as strict (see [[Strict resource group|Strict Resource Groups]]) and, if you choose to set the resource group as strict, set what platform type and platform sub type it should have. When you feel satisfied with your selections press “Create” to create the resource group. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Copy Resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have set up the configuration for a resource group it is sometimes convenient to make a copy of the resource group under a new name. To do this, select the resource group you would like to copy and press &amp;quot;Copy resource group&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Default labels ====&lt;br /&gt;
Default labels are a group of labels that will be associated with WCU or/and vehicle when a WCU joins a resource group. These labels will not affect current WCU/Vehicles in the resource group. To edit the set of labels press the “Edit default labels” button. New window will show. Read more about the edit default labels window [[Edit default labels window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approved Assignments ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can require that assignments must have been reviewed and approved before they can be applied to a resource group by checking the box &amp;quot;Require Approved Assignments&amp;quot;. If an assignment does not meet these criteria, the assignment will not be applied to the resource group. Read more about the assignment review process [[Review assignment process|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Fetch PINs ====&lt;br /&gt;
For portals with VCF enabled there will be a button &#039;&#039;&#039;Fetch PINs&#039;&#039;&#039; that will connect with PIE to fetch any available PINs for the resources in the group. These PINs can then be applied to the VCF configurations of the group. Read more about VCF [[Vehicle Communication Forwarder|here]] and about applying the fetched PINs [[I/O configurations#Apply uploaded PINs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====&lt;br /&gt;
In the right hand table in Figure &amp;quot;Manipulating Resources in Resource Group&amp;quot;, you see a set of resources for a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rg.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Manipulating Resources in Resource Group]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Status”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Status” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the color in the column will be green. The value is updated each 30 seconds. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The different color values are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Red ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration was edited after the resource group&#039;s configuration was saved. The WCU will never use the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Yellow ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration is the same as the resource group&#039;s but the WCU has not yet updated to this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Green ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU has updated to the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group&#039;s, see Figure &amp;quot;Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group&amp;quot; in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU&#039;s configuration rather than the group&#039;s configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Vehicle Profiles Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Alarm Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The User Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration46.png|border|800x800px]]The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in the Figure &amp;quot;User Administration Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
The nine columns are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;User ID&#039;&#039;&#039;. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Roles&#039;&#039;&#039;. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039;&#039;. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Address&#039;&#039;&#039;. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Last login date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date when the user last logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Two factor auth&#039;&#039;&#039;. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Logged in&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can see if the user is currently logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Creation Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date of when the user was created. Only visible on users created after December 3 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
# The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user&#039;s password.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit roles and permissions&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.&lt;br /&gt;
# Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.93 of the portal it is also possible for an admin user to impersonate another user. See [[New features in v2.93]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The New User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing the “New User” button the dialog appears as presented in Figure &amp;quot;New User Dialog&amp;quot;. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Add the roles that you want the user to have by moving roles from the left list to the right. You can hover each role to view more information about them. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”. If you click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; and the roles you have selected gives the user access to some wcus tasks, you will also be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well. This can also be done when editing the roles of a user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the new user has been created, that user is granted a default minimalistic view in both the Tasks- and Vehicles-panel. This mechanism exists to prevent new users from being overwhelmed by the large amount of columns available in these panels. Instead, they are only presented with the most important columns, with the option to see more columns if they want to. The default columns for new users are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Tasks panel&lt;br /&gt;
** Task ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment name&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment type&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Status&lt;br /&gt;
** Task creator&lt;br /&gt;
** Creation date&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
* Vehicles panel&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** VIN&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU comment&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU software version&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU connection time&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
** Active alarms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewUserDialog252.png|left|thumb|New User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PromptNewUserCurAss.png|left|thumb|Prompt to give user permission to currently running tasks on specified wcus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Edit User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Modify User Dialog&amp;quot;. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”. Advice the user to install &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot; on their phone before they login to the portal for the first time as the secret will only be shown once and must be installed in the authenticator app at that time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just like when adding a new user, you can give or remove roles to the user by clicking &amp;quot;Edit user roles&amp;quot; and moving roles from the left list to the right and vice versa. If you edit the user roles to add some wcu task permission to the user, you will also here be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditUser252.png|left|thumb|Modify User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Change Password Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change a user&#039;s password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog below will appear. It is pretty straightforward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|left|Change Password Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Show Secret Window====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|QR-code Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app (we recommend using &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot;), point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;QR-code Window&amp;quot;. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Edit User Roles and Permissions ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here it is also possible to edit user roles and permissions, read further instructions [[Roles and permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Labels Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer labels. Here you can enable/disable labels, rename labels which are not system labels and it is possible to make private labels global. If the feature is enabled at your site, it is also possible to configure label announcements here. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More about these functions can be found in [[Labels#Administer labels|Administer Labels]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The WCU Status Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.47 the WCU status tab has changed. See [[WCU Status]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The Following applies to portal version 2.46 and older:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This view is supposed to be used for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision is done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The set of status information collected comprises three parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General information:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Alive, a heart beat signal&lt;br /&gt;
* Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
** 4G&lt;br /&gt;
** 3G&lt;br /&gt;
** 2G&lt;br /&gt;
** none&lt;br /&gt;
* Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Storage Usage:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Collection Status:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A view of the panel is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;WCU Status Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|WCU Status Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Key Figures Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this tab it is possible to view charts over recorded statistics for the portal. More about this option is found under [[Key Figures]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.95&amp;diff=4016</id>
		<title>New features in v2.95</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.95&amp;diff=4016"/>
		<updated>2025-08-28T13:59:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support to view the history of how a specific assignment has evolved */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Improved support for uploading a vehicle import file ==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a Vehicle Import File|CSV import]] has gotten an upgrade, and now handles diagnostics files, vehicle profiles, and labels. It&#039;s also  more robust, and gives better error messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT tasks for strict resource groups ==&lt;br /&gt;
DLT tasks have now been expanded to work for strict resource groups. Additionally, when &#039;Use vehicle specific PINs&#039; is checked in UDS mode it is now be possible to do a check to see if any PINs for the specified ECUs are missing in the portal. The &#039;Check PINs&#039; feature is currently only available for resource groups. Read more about creating a DLT task [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|here]]. Read more about uploading PINs [[Vehicles#Upload Vehicle pins|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Compare WCU configurations ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare WCU configurations - menu.png|thumb|Compare WCU configurations from menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare WCU configurations - selections.png|thumb|Compare WCU configurations selections]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare WCU configurations - result.png|thumb|WCU configuration comparison results]]&lt;br /&gt;
A previous feature has been to compare a groups configuration with that of its resources. This has now been implemented for individual WCUs as well. Comparing individual WCU configurations is accessible via the [[Vehicles#Right click context menu|right-click menu]] on a selected WCU in the [[Vehicles|vehicles tab]]. From there you open a dialog where you can select multiple other WCUs to compare against the current WCU. Pressing &#039;Compare&#039; will then open a result panel displaying the differing configuration variables for each of the selected WCUs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved WCU state change search in WCU history ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to search for state transitions in the WCU history panel. For example, searching for a transition from &#039;&#039;In Operation&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;Shelving in Progress&#039;&#039; will return all instances where this change occurred. Read more about it [[Vehicles#Right click context menu|here.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New NO_SIGNAL operator for signal reader assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to view the history of how an assignment has evolved ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.95&amp;diff=4015</id>
		<title>New features in v2.95</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.95&amp;diff=4015"/>
		<updated>2025-08-28T13:57:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Improved support for uploading a vehicle import file ==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a Vehicle Import File|CSV import]] has gotten an upgrade, and now handles diagnostics files, vehicle profiles, and labels. It&#039;s also  more robust, and gives better error messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== DLT tasks for strict resource groups ==&lt;br /&gt;
DLT tasks have now been expanded to work for strict resource groups. Additionally, when &#039;Use vehicle specific PINs&#039; is checked in UDS mode it is now be possible to do a check to see if any PINs for the specified ECUs are missing in the portal. The &#039;Check PINs&#039; feature is currently only available for resource groups. Read more about creating a DLT task [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|here]]. Read more about uploading PINs [[Vehicles#Upload Vehicle pins|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Compare WCU configurations ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare WCU configurations - menu.png|thumb|Compare WCU configurations from menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare WCU configurations - selections.png|thumb|Compare WCU configurations selections]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare WCU configurations - result.png|thumb|WCU configuration comparison results]]&lt;br /&gt;
A previous feature has been to compare a groups configuration with that of its resources. This has now been implemented for individual WCUs as well. Comparing individual WCU configurations is accessible via the [[Vehicles#Right click context menu|right-click menu]] on a selected WCU in the [[Vehicles|vehicles tab]]. From there you open a dialog where you can select multiple other WCUs to compare against the current WCU. Pressing &#039;Compare&#039; will then open a result panel displaying the differing configuration variables for each of the selected WCUs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved WCU state change search in WCU history ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to search for state transitions in the WCU history panel. For example, searching for a transition from &#039;&#039;In Operation&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;Shelving in Progress&#039;&#039; will return all instances where this change occurred. Read more about it [[Vehicles#Right click context menu|here.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New NO_SIGNAL operator for signal reader assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to view the history of how a specific assignment has evolved ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.95&amp;diff=3995</id>
		<title>New features in v2.95</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.95&amp;diff=3995"/>
		<updated>2025-08-28T08:56:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Improved support for uploading a vehicle import file ==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a Vehicle Import File|CSV import]] has gotten an upgrade, and now handles diagnostics files, vehicle profiles, and labels. It&#039;s also  more robust, and gives better error messages.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3980</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3980"/>
		<updated>2025-06-27T07:43:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable tester address for signal reader, IDC, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fetch PINs button.png|thumb|Button to fetch PINs from PIE]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0 for portals with Vehicle Communication Forwarder (VCF) enabled, it will now be possible to get PINs from PIE for the WCUs in a group via &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Resource groups&#039;&#039;. This will save any found PINs that can then be applied to the VCF&#039;s configuration for each WCU in the group. Read more about configuring VCF [[Vehicle Communication Forwarder|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new column has been introduced to the Vehicles tab that will show the current state of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in the WCU configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;SOVD IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the WCU configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit from. More importantly, only the configuration settings changed will be applied to the WCUs, all other configuration settings will be untouched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser Edge ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new WCU platform called Kvaser Edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in the Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now view the frame name for both CAN and LIN signals directly within the &amp;quot;Add Signal&amp;quot; dialog for a recorder. Additionally, you can also bring out frame names for signals in the recorder by simple right clicks and select the column “Frame name”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;ve upgraded the assignment permission settings to give more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously, assignments could only be marked as private or public. Now, you can assign user-specific permissions to allowing selected users to access private, public, or both types of assignments. Read more [[Assignment Editor#Assignment permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved handling of copy assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve improved the Signal Reader Assignment copy functionality in the Assignment Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new version ensures a more reliable experience when duplicating assignments and preventing the process from getting stuck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label columns in various places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cybersecurity settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
For the WCU a bunch of cybersecurity settings are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable USB ethernet interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock Signal Reader&#039;s Signal Broker communication to localhost&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable the SSH daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Root password checks to prevent too weak passwords&lt;br /&gt;
* Software firewall on the WCU&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Instant downloads of multiple files ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.94 the previous background zipping of files described in [[Downloading Files]] is no longer needed. Instead the downloading starts immediately when clicking the &amp;quot;Get all files&amp;quot; button in [[Tasks Tab]] or the &amp;quot;Download&amp;quot; button in the [[Search Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved CAN frame logging in Signal Reader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The CAN frame logging has been improved to support CANFD frame logging and to support finalization of MF4 frame logs in recovery mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to announce monitored signals to third parties ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor-signals-announce.png|thumb|Announce monitored signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to also announce monitored signals to any of the queue types JMS, IBM MQ and Kafka. For this to happen this support must be enabled in the wcu-service as well and is not enabled for all customers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Monitor-signals-announce.png&amp;diff=3979</id>
		<title>File:Monitor-signals-announce.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Monitor-signals-announce.png&amp;diff=3979"/>
		<updated>2025-06-27T07:43:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;fsafsfds&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3971</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3971"/>
		<updated>2025-06-16T06:48:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Instant downloads of multiple files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable tester address for signal reader, IDC, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Fetch PINs button.png|thumb|Button to fetch PINs from PIE]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0 for portals with Vehicle Communication Forwarder (VCF) enabled, it will now be possible to get PINs from PIE for the WCUs in a group via &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Resource groups&#039;&#039;. This will save any found PINs that can then be applied to the VCF&#039;s configuration for each WCU in the group. Read more about configuring VCF [[Vehicle Communication Forwarder|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new column has been introduced to the Vehicles tab that will show the current state of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in the WCU configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;SOVD IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the WCU configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit from. More importantly, only the configuration settings changed will be applied to the WCUs, all other configuration settings will be untouched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser Edge ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser Edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in the Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now view the frame name for both CAN and LIN signals directly within the &amp;quot;Add Signal&amp;quot; dialog for a recorder. Additionally, you can also bring out frame names for signals in the recorder by simple right clicks and select the column “Frame name”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;ve upgraded the assignment permission settings to give more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously, assignments could only be marked as private or public. Now, you can assign user-specific permissions to allowing selected users to access private, public, or both types of assignments. Read more [[Assignment Editor#Assignment permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved handling of copy assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve improved the Signal Reader Assignment copy functionality in the Assignment Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new version ensures a more reliable experience when duplicating assignments and preventing the process from getting stuck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label columns in various places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cyber security settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
For the WCU a bunch of cyber security settings are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable USB ethernet interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock signal reader pub/sub communication to localhost&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable the SSH daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Root password checks to prevent too weak passwords&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Instant downloads of multiple files ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.94 the previous background zipping of files described in [[Downloading Files]] is no longer needed. Instead the downloading starts immediately when clicking the &amp;quot;Get all files&amp;quot; button in [[Tasks Tab]] or the &amp;quot;Download&amp;quot; button in the [[Search Tab]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3951</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3951"/>
		<updated>2025-06-13T07:24:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for admins to download description files. */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable tester address for signal reader, IDC, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new column has been introduced to the Vehicles tab that will show the current state of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in the WCU configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;SOVD IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the WCU configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit from. More importantly, only the configuration settings changed will be applied to the WCUs, all other configuration settings will be untouched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser Edge ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser Edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in the Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now view the frame name for both CAN and LIN signals directly within the &amp;quot;Add Signal&amp;quot; dialog for a recorder. Additionally, you can also bring out frame names for signals in the recorder by simple right clicks and select the column “Frame name”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;ve upgraded the assignment permission settings to give more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously, assignments could only be marked as private or public. Now, you can assign user-specific permissions to allowing selected users to access private, public, or both types of assignments. Read more [[Assignment Editor#Assignment permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved handling of copy assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve improved the Signal Reader Assignment copy functionality in the Assignment Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new version ensures a more reliable experience when duplicating assignments and preventing the process from getting stuck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label columns in various places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cyber security settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
For the WCU a bunch of cyber security settings are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable USB ethernet interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock signal reader pub/sub communication to localhost&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable the SSH daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Root password checks to prevent too weak passwords&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3950</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3950"/>
		<updated>2025-06-13T07:23:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for new platform Kvaser */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable tester address for signal reader, IDC, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new column has been introduced to the Vehicles tab that will show the current state of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in the WCU configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;SOVD IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the WCU configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit from. More importantly, only the configuration settings changed will be applied to the WCUs, all other configuration settings will be untouched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser Edge ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser Edge.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now view the frame name for both CAN and LIN signals directly within the &amp;quot;Add Signal&amp;quot; dialog for a recorder. Additionally, you can also bring out frame names for signals in the recorder by simple right clicks and select the column “Frame name”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;ve upgraded the assignment permission settings to give more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously, assignments could only be marked as private or public. Now, you can assign user-specific permissions to allowing selected users to access private, public, or both types of assignments. Read more [[Assignment Editor#Assignment permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved handling of copy assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve improved the Signal Reader Assignment copy functionality in the Assignment Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new version ensures a more reliable experience when duplicating assignments and preventing the process from getting stuck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label columns in various places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cyber security settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
For the WCU a bunch of cyber security settings are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable USB ethernet interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock signal reader pub/sub communication to localhost&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable the SSH daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Root password checks to prevent too weak passwords&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3949</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3949"/>
		<updated>2025-06-13T07:23:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable tester address for signal reader, IDC, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new column has been introduced to the Vehicles tab that will show the current state of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in the WCU configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;SOVD IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the WCU configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit from. More importantly, only the configuration settings changed will be applied to the WCUs, all other configuration settings will be untouched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now view the frame name for both CAN and LIN signals directly within the &amp;quot;Add Signal&amp;quot; dialog for a recorder. Additionally, you can also bring out frame names for signals in the recorder by simple right clicks and select the column “Frame name”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;ve upgraded the assignment permission settings to give more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously, assignments could only be marked as private or public. Now, you can assign user-specific permissions to allowing selected users to access private, public, or both types of assignments. Read more [[Assignment Editor#Assignment permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved handling of copy assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve improved the Signal Reader Assignment copy functionality in the Assignment Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new version ensures a more reliable experience when duplicating assignments and preventing the process from getting stuck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label columns in various places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cyber security settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
For the WCU a bunch of cyber security settings are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable USB ethernet interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock signal reader pub/sub communication to localhost&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable the SSH daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Root password checks to prevent too weak passwords&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3948</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3948"/>
		<updated>2025-06-13T07:21:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable tester address for signal reader, IDC, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new column has been introduced to the Vehicles tab that will show the current state of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in the WCU configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;SOVD IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the WCU configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now view the frame name for both CAN and LIN signals directly within the &amp;quot;Add Signal&amp;quot; dialog for a recorder. Additionally, you can also bring out frame names for signals in the recorder by simple right clicks and select the column “Frame name”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;ve upgraded the assignment permission settings to give more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously, assignments could only be marked as private or public. Now, you can assign user-specific permissions to allowing selected users to access private, public, or both types of assignments. Read more [[Assignment Editor#Assignment permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved handling of copy assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve improved the Signal Reader Assignment copy functionality in the Assignment Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new version ensures a more reliable experience when duplicating assignments and preventing the process from getting stuck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label columns in various places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cyber security settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
For the WCU a bunch of cyber security settings are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable USB ethernet interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock signal reader pub/sub communication to localhost&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable the SSH daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Root password checks to prevent too weak passwords&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3947</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3947"/>
		<updated>2025-06-13T07:21:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable tester address for signal reader, IDC, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new column has been introduced to the Vehicles tab that will show the current state of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;SOVD IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the WCU configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now view the frame name for both CAN and LIN signals directly within the &amp;quot;Add Signal&amp;quot; dialog for a recorder. Additionally, you can also bring out frame names for signals in the recorder by simple right clicks and select the column “Frame name”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;ve upgraded the assignment permission settings to give more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously, assignments could only be marked as private or public. Now, you can assign user-specific permissions to allowing selected users to access private, public, or both types of assignments. Read more [[Assignment Editor#Assignment permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved handling of copy assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve improved the Signal Reader Assignment copy functionality in the Assignment Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new version ensures a more reliable experience when duplicating assignments and preventing the process from getting stuck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label columns in various places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cyber security settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
For the WCU a bunch of cyber security settings are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable USB ethernet interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock signal reader pub/sub communication to localhost&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable the SSH daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Root password checks to prevent too weak passwords&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3946</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3946"/>
		<updated>2025-06-13T07:19:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable tester address for signal reader, IDC, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new column has been introduced to the Vehicles tab that will show the current state of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now view the frame name for both CAN and LIN signals directly within the &amp;quot;Add Signal&amp;quot; dialog for a recorder. Additionally, you can also bring out frame names for signals in the recorder by simple right clicks and select the column “Frame name”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
We&#039;ve upgraded the assignment permission settings to give more control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously, assignments could only be marked as private or public. Now, you can assign user-specific permissions to allowing selected users to access private, public, or both types of assignments. Read more [[Assignment Editor#Assignment permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved handling of copy assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
We’ve improved the Signal Reader Assignment copy functionality in the Assignment Creator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new version ensures a more reliable experience when duplicating assignments and preventing the process from getting stuck.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label columns in various places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cyber security settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
For the WCU a bunch of cyber security settings are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable USB ethernet interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock signal reader pub/sub communication to localhost&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable the SSH daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Root password checks to prevent too weak passwords&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=WCU_as_WiFi_Access_Point&amp;diff=3938</id>
		<title>WCU as WiFi Access Point</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=WCU_as_WiFi_Access_Point&amp;diff=3938"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T09:33:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Connection-2-94.png|724x724px|The Connection tab in the WCU configuration]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Internet Service Provider (ISP)&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|Which ISP to use when multiple SIM cards are installed &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;WICE portal address&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|The server that the WCU should use for fetching new tasks etc. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remote Login === &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remotelogin.png|Settings for remote login.]] &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|To be able to remotely login to the WCU you must first enable the functionality by checking this box. &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Server&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|The remote login proxy server to be used. &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|Username to be used when doing remote login. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WLAN === &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|If set, the WCU will try the WLAN connection first when communicating with the portal. &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Type of WLAN&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|Option for configuring the WCU as a WLAN client or as a WLAN Access Point. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Client ==== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wlanandclient.png|Settings for WLAN as Client.]] &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;SSID&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|The primary name associated with the WLAN that the WCU should connect to. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Passphrase&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|Password for the WLAN connection. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Security&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|Option for setting the Security protocol to WPA2 personal or WPA2 PEAP. &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;WPA2 Personal&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|Read more about WPA2 [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wi-Fi_Protected_Access here.] &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;WPA2 PEAP&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|Read more about PEAP [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Protected_Extensible_Authentication_Protocol here.] &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Identity&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|The Identity is used in PEAP in order for the authenticator to choose the correct authentication server to process the credentials. &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|Certificate used for network access authentication. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Access Point ==== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wlanandap.png|Settings for WLAN as Access Point.]] &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;SSID&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|The primary name associated with the WLAN Access Point. &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Passphrase&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|Password for the WLAN AP connection. Must be at least 8 characters long and contain no spaces. &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Country Code&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|The country code for the country where the WCU will be acting as a WLAN Access point. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Connection-2-94.png&amp;diff=3937</id>
		<title>File:Connection-2-94.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Connection-2-94.png&amp;diff=3937"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T09:33:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;dffdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3933</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3933"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:41:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support to search for empty values in label columns */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved handling of copy assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label coulmns in various places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cyper security settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
For the WCU a bunch of cyber security settings are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable USB ethernet interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock signal reader pub/sub communication to localhost&lt;br /&gt;
* Disable the SSH daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Root password checks to prevent too weak passwords&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3931</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3931"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:36:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support to see when a label was associated with a resource */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for show signal info for all signals in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in add signals for assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to search for empty values in label columns ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can now search for the absence of values in your label coulmns in various places.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3929</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3929"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:35:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for admins to download description files. */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3928</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3928"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:33:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* New assignment editor permission */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateSubSetOfWCUConfigruationVariable.png|thumb|Update a subset of WCU configuration variables window]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can now edit the configuration of multiple WCUs simultaneously. When doing so, the same configuration editor will appear, but with a few new additions. A new &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Show Changed Settings&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to easily track any modifications you&#039;ve made. Additionally, a new dropdown menu labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Settings from WCU&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you select which WCU’s configuration you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New assignment editor permission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to see when a label was associated with a resource ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New label viewer.png|thumb|101x101px|New label viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is now support to see at what time a specific label was associated with a resource.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:New_label_viewer.png&amp;diff=3926</id>
		<title>File:New label viewer.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:New_label_viewer.png&amp;diff=3926"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:33:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;cdfdfdffdf&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:New-label-viewer-2-94.png&amp;diff=3923</id>
		<title>File:New-label-viewer-2-94.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:New-label-viewer-2-94.png&amp;diff=3923"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:31:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;ddddd&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3922</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3922"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:28:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New assignment editor permission ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3921</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3921"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:26:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm when a shelved WCU tries to connect with a vehicle ==&lt;br /&gt;
An alarm is raised when a WCU is in any of its shelved states and tries to connect with a vehicle. The category is &#039;wcu::state::shelved::connect&#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3920</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3920"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:21:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later. This is only enabled for customers needing support for the function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Vehicle_Profiles&amp;diff=3919</id>
		<title>Vehicle Profiles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Vehicle_Profiles&amp;diff=3919"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:19:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: Chnaged image for 2.94.0.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Vehicle-profiles-2-94.png|alt=Vehicle Profiles Panel|none|thumb|1000x1000px|Vehicle Profiles Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
As an administrator, it is possible to define vehicle profiles from version 2.45 of the WICE portal. The vehicle profiles panel is located in the [[The Portal Administrator View#The Administration Tab|the administration tab]] as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Vehicle Profiles Panel&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add a new vehicle profile ==&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new vehicle profile, click &amp;quot;Add new Vehicle Profile&amp;quot; in the &amp;quot;Vehicle Profiles&amp;quot; portlet to the left in the view. Choose a name and press enter. This will create a new vehicle profile with no interfaces defined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Define CAN interfaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Custom car types 2.png|thumb|300x300px|Add CAN Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
To define a new CAN interface for a vehicle profile, select the vehicle profile in the &amp;quot;Vehicle Profiles&amp;quot; portlet and then click &amp;quot;Add CAN&amp;quot; in the CAN portlet. This will open up the dialog as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Add CAN Dialog&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The majority of the interface attributes should be self explanatory but the DBC file may need some clarification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal settings settings, J1939 and CAN decoding can be activated. J1939 is either true or false but CAN decoding has a version. Today all CAN with decoding has to use the same version.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Select DBC file ====&lt;br /&gt;
A CAN bus needs to be associated with a DBC file and when defining a CAN interface one have the option to select an already upload DBC file or upload a new one. Uploading DBC files can be done via the DBC files portlet (described in [[#Manage DBC files]]) or directly in the select DBC files grid shown in Figure &amp;quot;Select DBC Files Grid&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Define ECU interfaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
ECU interfaces are connected to a CAN interface. When adding a new ECU you will first be prompted to choose ECU name. The ECU names presented here are those ECU names that have a A2L file associated with them. When a ECU name is chosen, the available A2L files for that ECU are displayed and can be chosen. Drag and drop is supported when choosing files. You may choose multiple files per ECU.&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to add a seed/key to ECUs individually. The value of each Seed/Key is never displayed for the user as it can be considered confidential. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddNewECU.png|none|thumb|363x363px|Add new ECU]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Define Flexray interfaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
The interfaces are similar to the CAN interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Define ETH interfaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
The interfaces are similar to the CAN interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Define LIN interfaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
The interfaces are similiar to the CAN interfaces.[[File:Custom car types 3.png|thumb|300x300px|Select DBC Files Grid|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Copy / Create new vehicle profile from an existing one ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create a new vehicle profile based on an existing one by selecting the vehicle profile you want to create the new vehicle profile from and then clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will now get a new vehicle profile named &amp;quot;Original name - Copy&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diagnostic templates - Manage active signals connected to the vehicle profile ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vehicle-profile-red-marked-diagnostic-template.png|alt=The &amp;quot;Diagnostic templates&amp;quot; button|left|thumb|The &amp;quot;Diagnostic templates&amp;quot; button]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-diag-ref-edit-mode.png|thumb|Diagnostic templates dialog - Edit mode|379x379px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-diag-ref-view-mode.png|center|thumb|Diagnostic templates dialog - Choose mode|230x230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decide which ECUs shall be connected to the vehicle profile for when measuring [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor#Active signals|active signals]] (diagnostics). Either by adding ECUs manually or by picking from uploaded description files (see [[Vehicle_Profiles#Manage_Description_files|The Description Files portlet]] for how to upload). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple files and/or single picking of ECUs is possible. The choice is then saved as a Diagnostic template and can be reused by other vehicle profiles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to create/edit a Diagnostic template:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload description files in [[Vehicle_Profiles#Manage_Description_files|The Description Files portlet]] to make files and ECUs available.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the “Vehicle Profiles” tab - in the “Vehicle Profile”-section - find the vehicle profile you want to connect a description file to and select it or do not select any if only editing/viewing Diagnostic templates is desired.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on “Diagnostic template”.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose an already made template, create a new or edit an existing.&lt;br /&gt;
## When in create-/edit-mode - move ECUs/files from left to right to select them and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
## Save any changes that was made.&lt;br /&gt;
# If a vehicle profile was selected in step 2: Click &amp;quot;Choose diagnostic template&amp;quot; to associate a template with the selected vehicle profile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Generate a Diagnostic Template ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vehicle-profile-red-marked-generate-diagnostic-template.png|alt=The &amp;quot;Generate diagnostic template&amp;quot; button|thumb|The &amp;quot;Generate diagnostic template&amp;quot; button]]&lt;br /&gt;
Based on having vehicles reporting the ECUs software version, using an SoH task, there is opportunity to let the system create a template based on what is reported. When pressing the button &#039;Generate diagnostic template&#039;, you will presented with the following window:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vehicle-profiles-generate-template-result1.png|alt=A generated diagnostic template|left|thumb|A generated diagnostic template]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are three sections:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Non Existing, no diagnostic data for the specific ECU software version exists. Upload a suitable SDDB file to fix this.&lt;br /&gt;
* Existing, those have been selected&lt;br /&gt;
* Clashes. It might be the case that there exists multiple ECUs with the same address but with different names having the same software version. You must select which to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are done you simply press update or check &#039;Add new template&#039; to create an entirely new template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage Description files ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vehicle-description-files.png|thumb|The Vehicle Description files portlet]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Vehicle Description files&amp;quot; portlet let the user upload, change or remove description files. These files are used to describe the vehicle. Supported description files are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;DBC&#039;&#039;&#039; - describing CAN interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;FIBEX&#039;&#039;&#039; - describing Flexray interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;A2L&#039;&#039;&#039; - describing ECU interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ECU&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Diagnostics&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g. sddb-files) - provides which ECUs that are available for creating [[Vehicle_Profiles#Diagnostic_templates_-_Manage_active_signals_connected_to_the_vehicle_profile|diagnostic templates]]. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;LDF&#039;&#039;&#039; - describing LIN interfaces &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload new Description file ===&lt;br /&gt;
To upload a new Description file, click the &amp;quot;Upload new file&amp;quot; button and choose the file to upload.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Upload A2L file =====&lt;br /&gt;
When uploading an A2L file there is the possibility to specify file version. This can be used to validate if a created Signal Reader and Area5 assignment can run on a given WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also the possibility to specify which ECU name that the A2L file. This must be specified and cannot be edited later so make sure you choose the correct ECU. The list you are presented with when choosing ECU name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
are the ECU names that have been found in uploaded ECU diagnostic files.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UploadNewA2lFile.png|none|thumb|Upload new A2L file]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit Description file ===&lt;br /&gt;
To edit an uploaded Description file, select the Description file and click &amp;quot;Edit selected&amp;quot;. A new window will pop up which let you do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Replace Description file: ====&lt;br /&gt;
Replace the current Description file with another file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Change name: ====&lt;br /&gt;
Change the name that references the Description file in the Description file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Comment: ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add a comment to the Description file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enable/disable: ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enable/disable the Description file.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Vehicle-profiles-2-94.png&amp;diff=3918</id>
		<title>File:Vehicle-profiles-2-94.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Vehicle-profiles-2-94.png&amp;diff=3918"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:18:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;dfffff&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3917</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3917"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:14:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for admins to download description files. */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3916</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3916"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:13:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for admins to download description files. ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dowload-desc-files.png|thumb|Download description file]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you are an admin and the function is turned on, you have the opportunity to download the vehicle description files found in Administration-&amp;gt;Vehicle Profiles panel.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:New-dowload-desc-files.png&amp;diff=3915</id>
		<title>File:New-dowload-desc-files.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:New-dowload-desc-files.png&amp;diff=3915"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:12:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;New download button.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3914</id>
		<title>New features in v2.94</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.94&amp;diff=3914"/>
		<updated>2025-06-12T07:06:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for labels in vehicle templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, the Vehicle Template panel supports adding labels to vehicle templates. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Extend WCU history to account for more changes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new columns have been added to the WCU history: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Type of Change&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;State&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type of Change&#039;&#039;&#039; indicates whether the update involved a configuration change, a tools change, or a label change.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;State&#039;&#039;&#039; reflects the WCU’s status at the time of the change, such as &amp;quot;In Operation&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can read more about these updates [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurable Tester address for sigread, idc, SoH and vinreader ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SignalReader, IDC, State of Health, and VINReader modules have all been updated to include a new field called &#039;Tester Address.&#039; In the VINReader module, this field is visible only when the ID reader method is set to SPA 29. Additionally, the Tester Address field is available only with WCU version 2.94.0 or later. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice294/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Configure_the_Vinreader_Module here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch PINs from PIE ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New column for WCU state in Vehicles Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for SOVD IP Address in edit configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.94.0, you can enter either an IPv4 address or a physical ID in the &#039;Sovd IP Address&#039; field located under the Connection tab in the Edit Configuration settings. This field is only visible when the WCU is running version 2.94.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update a subset of WCU configuration variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for new platform Kvaser ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support for a new platform called Kvaser.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.93&amp;diff=3886</id>
		<title>New features in v2.93</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.93&amp;diff=3886"/>
		<updated>2025-05-05T08:46:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Computed value labels */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for using labels to control permissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to select resources by labels as an alternative to select resources manually when selecting resources for a permission in [[Roles and permissions]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels in permissions1.png|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permission label2.png|thumb|Select resources by labels|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
When a label is selected as in the screenshot, the WCUs which are currently associated with the label are added to the set of selected resources. Multiple labels can also be used to either collect more resources or narrow down the resources depending on the chosen relation between the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the permission has been saved, any additional resources which get associated with the labels used in the permission will automatically be added to the permission. Since these labels now controls one or many permissions, only the users with the role admin can add or remove the labels from resources as long as they are part of any permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for impersonating another user ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Impersonate user.png|thumb|Impersonate user|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
An admin user can impersonate another user by selecting a user in the [[The Portal Administrator View#The_User_Tab]] and click the new button &amp;quot;Impersonate&amp;quot; as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Impersonate user&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Impersonating user.png|thumb|Impersonating user|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the button has been clicked, the portal will be reloaded and once logged in again you are now impersonating the selected user. See screenshot &amp;quot;Impersonating user&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To stop impersonating, one can either click the new &amp;quot;Stop impersonating user&amp;quot; icon next to the red text &amp;quot;Impersonating user&amp;quot; or click the logout icon in the upper right corner of the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Platform types in WMUs ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Selected platform for new WMU.png|thumb|Select platform for new WMU|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a new WMU via the portal GUI it is now mandatory to select the platform for the new WMU as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Select platform for new WMU&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the WMU is running WMU version 3.0.0 or above it will also report its platform back to the portal. In the case the reported platform does not match the selected platform a warning will be shown and the selected platform must be changed to the reported before the WCU configuration can be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reported WMU platform does not match selected2.png|thumb|Reported WMU platform does not match selected|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
See screenshot &amp;quot;Reported WMU platform does not match selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for moving a vehicle to a resource group when applying a vehicle template ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to move a vehicle into a resource group with the help of vehicle templates. For more detailed information on how to use this feature, you can read more [[Vehicle templates|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update all vehicles to use a specific SDDB/CSV file ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new button, &amp;quot;Apply File to All Vehicles&amp;quot;, has been added to ECU Diagnostics. This enables users to apply an SDDB/CSV file to all vehicles at once, making the process of updating multiple vehicles easier.[[File:ApplyFileToAllVehicles.png|thumb|Apply File To all Vehicles|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for MDF file recovery after a WCU crash ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.93, the WCU can recover Signal Reader measurement data after a crash or similar unexpected shut-down. To enable this, there is a new checkbox called &#039;Recover MDF files after unexpected shutdowns&#039; in the Signal Reader module settings. If the checkbox is checked and the WCU crashes, MDF signal data will be recovered  from the temporary signal data storage on the WCU the next time the WCU is started. The recovered MDF file is uploaded to the WICE back-end. Pre-trig logging is not possible to recover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for checking missing and invalid VCF PINs in resource groups ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Check PINs window.png|thumb|Check for invalid PINs in resource group|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the portal supports VCF it is now possible from the IO-tab in edit configuration to check which WCUs in a resource group have missing or wrongly uploaded PINs for VCF. This will bring up a window that gives a summary for each WCU in the group that have missing or invalid PINs. WCUs with all valid VCF PINs will not be shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment editor improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
Improvements for Assignment editor: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When copying an assignment, users can choose to copy permissions as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Vehicle profile information is now displayed at the bottom of all assignment types, indicating whether it is based on the latest vehicle profile.&lt;br /&gt;
* Signals can now be pasted into the DAQ list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in result file ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to include frame names in the result file. This option can be enabled in the Modules tab. Keep in mind that enabling this feature will increase the file size. You can read more [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor#Frame names in result file|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Computed value labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create computed value label.png|thumb|Create computed value label|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s now possible to create labels which will calculate a value when associated with a resource. One usecase is to use a computed label as a resource group default label to keep track of when resources was added to the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following types are available at the moment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Current date - the association date in ISO_DATE format.&lt;br /&gt;
* Current date time - the association date/time in ISO_DATE_TIME format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm for failed VIN readouts ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCU fails to read VIN from vehicles at startup an alarm is raised. The alarm is wcu::info::vin::not_present.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.93&amp;diff=3885</id>
		<title>New features in v2.93</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.93&amp;diff=3885"/>
		<updated>2025-05-05T08:45:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for using labels to control permissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to select resources by labels as an alternative to select resources manually when selecting resources for a permission in [[Roles and permissions]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels in permissions1.png|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permission label2.png|thumb|Select resources by labels|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
When a label is selected as in the screenshot, the WCUs which are currently associated with the label are added to the set of selected resources. Multiple labels can also be used to either collect more resources or narrow down the resources depending on the chosen relation between the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the permission has been saved, any additional resources which get associated with the labels used in the permission will automatically be added to the permission. Since these labels now controls one or many permissions, only the users with the role admin can add or remove the labels from resources as long as they are part of any permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for impersonating another user ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Impersonate user.png|thumb|Impersonate user|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
An admin user can impersonate another user by selecting a user in the [[The Portal Administrator View#The_User_Tab]] and click the new button &amp;quot;Impersonate&amp;quot; as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Impersonate user&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Impersonating user.png|thumb|Impersonating user|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the button has been clicked, the portal will be reloaded and once logged in again you are now impersonating the selected user. See screenshot &amp;quot;Impersonating user&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To stop impersonating, one can either click the new &amp;quot;Stop impersonating user&amp;quot; icon next to the red text &amp;quot;Impersonating user&amp;quot; or click the logout icon in the upper right corner of the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Platform types in WMUs ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Selected platform for new WMU.png|thumb|Select platform for new WMU|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a new WMU via the portal GUI it is now mandatory to select the platform for the new WMU as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Select platform for new WMU&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the WMU is running WMU version 3.0.0 or above it will also report its platform back to the portal. In the case the reported platform does not match the selected platform a warning will be shown and the selected platform must be changed to the reported before the WCU configuration can be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reported WMU platform does not match selected2.png|thumb|Reported WMU platform does not match selected|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
See screenshot &amp;quot;Reported WMU platform does not match selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for moving a vehicle to a resource group when applying a vehicle template ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to move a vehicle into a resource group with the help of vehicle templates. For more detailed information on how to use this feature, you can read more [[Vehicle templates|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update all vehicles to use a specific SDDB/CSV file ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new button, &amp;quot;Apply File to All Vehicles&amp;quot;, has been added to ECU Diagnostics. This enables users to apply an SDDB/CSV file to all vehicles at once, making the process of updating multiple vehicles easier.[[File:ApplyFileToAllVehicles.png|thumb|Apply File To all Vehicles|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for MDF file recovery after a WCU crash ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.93, the WCU can recover Signal Reader measurement data after a crash or similar unexpected shut-down. To enable this, there is a new checkbox called &#039;Recover MDF files after unexpected shutdowns&#039; in the Signal Reader module settings. If the checkbox is checked and the WCU crashes, MDF signal data will be recovered  from the temporary signal data storage on the WCU the next time the WCU is started. The recovered MDF file is uploaded to the WICE back-end. Pre-trig logging is not possible to recover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for checking missing and invalid VCF PINs in resource groups ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Check PINs window.png|thumb|Check for invalid PINs in resource group|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the portal supports VCF it is now possible from the IO-tab in edit configuration to check which WCUs in a resource group have missing or wrongly uploaded PINs for VCF. This will bring up a window that gives a summary for each WCU in the group that have missing or invalid PINs. WCUs with all valid VCF PINs will not be shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment editor improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
Improvements for Assignment editor: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When copying an assignment, users can choose to copy permissions as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Vehicle profile information is now displayed at the bottom of all assignment types, indicating whether it is based on the latest vehicle profile.&lt;br /&gt;
* Signals can now be pasted into the DAQ list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in result file ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to include frame names in the result file. This option can be enabled in the Modules tab. Keep in mind that enabling this feature will increase the file size. You can read more [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor#Frame names in result file|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Computed value labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create computed value label.png|left|thumb|Create computed value label]]&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s now possible to create labels which will calculate a value when associated with a resource. One usecase is to use a computed label as a resource group default label to keep track of when resources was added to the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following types are available at the moment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Current date - the association date in ISO_DATE format.&lt;br /&gt;
* Current date time - the association date/time in ISO_DATE_TIME format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm for failed VIN readouts ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCU fails to read VIN from vehicles at startup an alarm is raised. The alarm is wcu::info::vin::not_present.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.93&amp;diff=3884</id>
		<title>New features in v2.93</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.93&amp;diff=3884"/>
		<updated>2025-05-05T08:45:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for using labels to control permissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to select resources by labels as an alternative to select resources manually when selecting resources for a permission in [[Roles and permissions]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels in permissions1.png|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permission label2.png|thumb|Select resources by labels|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
When a label is selected as in the screenshot, the WCUs which are currently associated with the label are added to the set of selected resources. Multiple labels can also be used to either collect more resources or narrow down the resources depending on the chosen relation between the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the permission has been saved, any additional resources which get associated with the labels used in the permission will automatically be added to the permission. Since these labels now controls one or many permissions, only the users with the role admin can add or remove the labels from resources as long as they are part of any permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for impersonating another user ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Impersonate user.png|thumb|Impersonate user|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
An admin user can impersonate another user by selecting a user in the [[The Portal Administrator View#The_User_Tab]] and click the new button &amp;quot;Impersonate&amp;quot; as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Impersonate user&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Impersonating user.png|thumb|Impersonating user|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the button has been clicked, the portal will be reloaded and once logged in again you are now impersonating the selected user. See screenshot &amp;quot;Impersonating user&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To stop impersonating, one can either click the new &amp;quot;Stop impersonating user&amp;quot; icon next to the red text &amp;quot;Impersonating user&amp;quot; or click the logout icon in the upper right corner of the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Platform types in WMUs ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Selected platform for new WMU.png|thumb|Select platform for new WMU|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a new WMU via the portal GUI it is now mandatory to select the platform for the new WMU as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Select platform for new WMU&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the WMU is running WMU version 3.0.0 or above it will also report its platform back to the portal. In the case the reported platform does not match the selected platform a warning will be shown and the selected platform must be changed to the reported before the WCU configuration can be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reported WMU platform does not match selected2.png|thumb|Reported WMU platform does not match selected|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
See screenshot &amp;quot;Reported WMU platform does not match selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for moving a vehicle to a resource group when applying a vehicle template ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to move a vehicle into a resource group with the help of vehicle templates. For more detailed information on how to use this feature, you can read more [[Vehicle templates|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to update all vehicles to use a specific SDDB/CSV file ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new button, &amp;quot;Apply File to All Vehicles&amp;quot;, has been added to ECU Diagnostics. This enables users to apply an SDDB/CSV file to all vehicles at once, making the process of updating multiple vehicles easier.[[File:ApplyFileToAllVehicles.png|thumb|Apply File To all Vehicles|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for MDF file recovery after a WCU crash ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.93, the WCU can recover Signal Reader measurement data after a crash or similar unexpected shut-down. To enable this, there is a new checkbox called &#039;Recover MDF files after unexpected shutdowns&#039; in the Signal Reader module settings. If the checkbox is checked and the WCU crashes, MDF signal data will be recovered  from the temporary signal data storage on the WCU the next time the WCU is started. The recovered MDF file is uploaded to the WICE back-end. Pre-trig logging is not possible to recover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for checking missing and invalid VCF PINs in resource groups ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Check PINs window.png|thumb|Check for invalid PINs in resource group|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the portal supports VCF it is now possible from the IO-tab in edit configuration to check which WCUs in a resource group have missing or wrongly uploaded PINs for VCF. This will bring up a window that gives a summary for each WCU in the group that have missing or invalid PINs. WCUs with all valid VCF PINs will not be shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment editor improvement ==&lt;br /&gt;
Improvements for Assignment editor: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When copying an assignment, users can choose to copy permissions as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Vehicle profile information is now displayed at the bottom of all assignment types, indicating whether it is based on the latest vehicle profile.&lt;br /&gt;
* Signals can now be pasted into the DAQ list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Frame names in result file ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to include frame names in the result file. This option can be enabled in the Modules tab. Keep in mind that enabling this feature will increase the file size. You can read more [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor#Frame names in result file|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Computed value labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create computed value label.png|left|thumb|Create computed value label]]&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s now possible to create labels which will calculate a value when associated with a resource. One usecase is to use a computed label as a resource group default label to keep track of when resources was added to the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following types are available at the moment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Current date - the association date in ISO_DATE format.&lt;br /&gt;
* Current date time - the association date/time in ISO_DATE_TIME format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New alarm for failed VIN readouts ==&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCU fails to read VIN from vehicles at startup an alarm is raised. The alarm is wcu::info::vin::not_present.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=3840</id>
		<title>Shelve and Unshelve a WCU</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Shelve_and_Unshelve_a_WCU&amp;diff=3840"/>
		<updated>2025-02-26T12:53:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;=== Shelve and Unshelve a WCU ===&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When a WCU is shelved it is disconnected from its car, if connected, and removed from its resource group, if any. In addition all active measure tasks are set to stopped pending and the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_in_progress&#039;&#039; is attached. This label will remain until all tasks for the WCU have status &#039;&#039;Stopped&#039;&#039; and all gathered measure data is uploaded to the portal after of which the label is replaced by the system label &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;. In this final stage it is also possible to unshelve the WCU using the corresponding button and thus removing the &#039;&#039;shelving_done&#039;&#039;-label. Note that when a WCU either has shelving in progress or is shelved it is no longer possible to add new measure tasks. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to &amp;quot;Unshelve&amp;quot; one or multiple WCUs using the &amp;quot;Unshelve&amp;quot;-button in the Vehicles-tab. If the choices does not apply to the set of selected resources the button is disabled. It is possible to unshelve a WCU from any of the existing shelving states; shelving in progress, shelved, shelving refurbish in progress or refurbished. Note that the user must have the permission &#039;&#039;&#039;wcu:shelving:write&#039;&#039;&#039; to be able to perform this operation.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=3810</id>
		<title>The Portal Administrator View</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&amp;diff=3810"/>
		<updated>2024-12-17T09:36:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* The Resource Groups Tab */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to what a normal user can do, an administrator can create and modify users and stop tasks for any task. &lt;br /&gt;
These new functions will be explained in the next three chapters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We will start with the &#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039; tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the &#039;&#039;Vehicles&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
Lastly is the &#039;&#039;Administration&#039;&#039; tab with five sub tabs consisting of: the &#039;&#039;Connect&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Archives&#039;&#039; tab the&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;GDS/SDDB files&#039;&#039; tab, the &#039;&#039;Resource Groups&#039;&#039; tab and the &#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Tasks Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32a.png|thumb|Stopping Running Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 32b.png|thumb|Force Stop Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator the administrator can search and view any user&#039;s task. Also, it has one more button present. An administrator can send a &#039;&#039;Force Stop&#039;&#039; command to any WCU.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Figure &amp;quot;Stopping Running Task&amp;quot; shows the &amp;quot;Stop assigment&amp;quot; button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running task. When a running task is stopped, it changes state to &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot;. This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; in the portal view. The administrator view&#039;s &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot; button, which can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Force Stop Task&amp;quot;, forces a &amp;quot;Stop pending&amp;quot; task into &amp;quot;Stopped&amp;quot; state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a portal of version 2.60 and forward, it is also possible for an administrator to remove all resultfiles for a selected task using the corresponding context menu option. When doing so, a confirmation dialog pops up to ensure that it is in fact the intended choice. Note that this option is disabled if multiple tasks are selected or if the selected task does not have any result files attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Vehicles Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can do quite a lot of things in this view, an illustration of which is presented in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Vehicles]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Vehicles panel adm buttons Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-06-17.png|left|thumb|800x800px|The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The New WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog presented in in Figure &amp;quot;The Add New WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration34.png|frame|left|The Add New WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit WCU Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a WCU simply mark it in the table and press the button called &amp;quot;Edit WCU&amp;quot;. This results in a dialog where the fields differ depending on editability. For one selected WCU these are the comment, name, whether it is active or not, the labels for the WCU or if it requires approved assignments. However, if the WCU has tasks which have status pending, running, warning or error (or corresponding partial statuses), the active option is disabled. This is also true if the WCU is connected to a vehicle or if it is included in a resource group. By checking &amp;quot;Require approved assignments&amp;quot; you can only add assignments that have been reviewed and then approved by the reviewers. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-wcu-2.87.png|alt=Edit a WCU|thumb|Edit a WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
If the selected WCU is a resource group the dialog will appear as presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit WCU Dialog&amp;quot;. The difference here is the &amp;quot;Apply label to resource group&#039;s WCUs&amp;quot;checkbox. When this option is selected the labels selected in the &amp;quot;Manage labels&amp;quot;-selector are also added to the WCUs included in the resource group. It is, though, not possible to remove labels from the resource group&#039;s WCUs using this checkbox. To do so use instead the context menu options for label management. [[File:Edit wcu.png|thumb|Edit a Resource Group WCU Dialog|left]]It is also possible to edit multiple WCUs simultaneously. If several WCUs are selected the dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Multiple WCUs&amp;quot; appear. This is only possible for the fields &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Active&amp;quot; and these are enabled using the corresponding checkbox to the right. If one of the selected WCUs fulfill the conditions presented above for the disablement of the Active-option, it will not be possible to select the corresponding checkbox. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit wcu multiple.png|thumb|Edit Multiple WCUs|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit the WCU Configuration===&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Configuration&#039;&#039;&#039; to open up the window in Figures &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Modules&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: IO&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;150&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config1.png|Edit Configuration: Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config2.png|Edit Configuration: Connection.&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config3.png|Edit Configuration: WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
File:Power-management.png|alt=Power Management|Edit configuration: Power Management&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu config5.png|Edit Configuration: Upload.&lt;br /&gt;
File:NewOiGui.png|Edit configuration: IO&lt;br /&gt;
File:Wcu extra bundles.png|Edit Configuration: Extra bundles.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Modules====&lt;br /&gt;
The set of checkboxes for the different modules that are present are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Disabling modules will speed up the boot process of the WCU (but will make the corresponding functionality unavailable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit &amp;quot;Car type&amp;quot;, click on the field where the car type is displayed to open the &amp;quot;Edit car&amp;quot; dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The last three checkboxes, &amp;quot;Run IDC at boot&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Run IDC at ignition off&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Enable VIN reader&amp;quot; are pretty much self-explanatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connection====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Connection&amp;quot;  and the tab content for the WLAN part is described [[WCU as WiFi Access Point|here.]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on site,i.e. is enabled, and if the WCU software is at least 2.90.0, an option of configuring a [https://www.wireguard.com/ WireGuard] VPN is available and described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Remote Login =====&lt;br /&gt;
Determines if it is possible to connect to the WCU remotely - possibly configured with an active time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To enable remote login - select &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To enabletime limit - select &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot; and enter a value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login add.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Add]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a time limit is active, the following is possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable remote login - deselect &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To disable time limit - deselect &amp;quot;Time Limited&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the time limit - select &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; and enter a new value for hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote login edit.png|thumb|Time limited remote login - Edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WCU====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Unit ID&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The automatically generated unique WCU identifier. The ID is immutable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform subtype&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform subtype.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU software version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the currently installed WCU software version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred WCU software&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed. When updating to a new version, the configuration dialog will update itself immediately to reflect what is available in the new version, hence accordingly also when downgrading. This means that new settings regarding the WCU&#039;s modules will also be upgraded which makes it possible to edit the modules according to the new version. In addition, when creating new tasks, validation will be carried out to the new version and hence you will not have to wait for the WCU to be updated to the new version to use new features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Perform reset on update&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;MX4 firmware version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The currently installed MX4 firmware version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Preferred MX4 firmware&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The new preferred MX4 firmware.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and possibly subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in &amp;quot;Set root password&amp;quot; and save the configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Local Scheduling Time Zone&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a WCU of version 2.53 or higher it is possible to configure a local time zone for the WCU using the option &amp;quot;Local scheduling time zone&amp;quot; presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: WCU&amp;quot;. This field consist of a drop down menu displaying the selectable time zones, which are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Universal&lt;br /&gt;
* Africa/Cairo&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Anchorage&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Caracas&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Chicago&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Denver&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Los_Angeles&lt;br /&gt;
* America/New_York&lt;br /&gt;
* America/Sao_Paulo&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dhaka&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Dubai&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Hong_Kong&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Karachi&lt;br /&gt;
* Asia/Tokyo&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Adelaide&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Brisbane&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Darwin&lt;br /&gt;
* Australia/Sydney&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/London&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Moscow&lt;br /&gt;
* Europe/Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The zone defined here will be enforced selecting &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot; when scheduling a task, see description [[Creating a Task#CAN-recorder#Scheduling|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Blink Controller&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version later than or equal to 2.54 it is possible to configure the blink controller for the WCU diods, which can be set to blink in different patterns to represent different WCU states. Selecting &amp;quot;Legacy&amp;quot; in the corresponding drop down menu will result in the WCU controlling the diods and the &amp;quot;DioIPD&amp;quot;-option means that the DioIPD will controll them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Enable NTP Server&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enable or disable the NTP server by the use of a checkbox named thereafter for WCUs of version 2.60 or later. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wcu certficate three files.png|thumb|Files for Certificate Update]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the WCU is version 2.52 or later you have an opportunity to update the WCU&#039;s certificate and related files. If the conditions mentioned are met you will see a checkbox saying &amp;quot;Update certificate related files&amp;quot;, see Figure &amp;quot;Files for Certificate Update&amp;quot;. When checking the checkbox, an additional three fields are revealed. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Certificate file, choose a certificate file to upload which is in PEM format.&lt;br /&gt;
* Private key file, choose a private key to upload in PEM format as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* Password file, choose a file with the password to the private key. The file should be plain text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must supply all three files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to see what certificate is installed on the WCU at any time, there is text field called &amp;quot;Current fingerprint&amp;quot;. If you have recently updated a WCUs certificate, you can by hovering over the field also see if the WCU is using the latest certificate. If this the case a message saying &amp;quot;Using latest certificate&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Renew WCU Certificate&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to renew a WCU&#039;s certificate by selecting the checkbox &amp;quot;Renew certificate&amp;quot;. Doing so will automatically issue a new certificate when the configuration is saved. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenewCertificate.png|thumb|Renew Certificate]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enable PTP ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ptp-setting-wcu.png|alt=PTP settings in the WCU configuration|thumb|PTP settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.81.0 of the WCU software there support for starting a PTP daemon on the WCU in order to synchronize time between units connected to the WCU. The protocol is designed to attain a higher accuracy than when using NTP. When you enable the setting you must also select to which interface on the WCU the daemon should listen on. You can see what it looks like in the illustration on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Perodic Wake-up]]&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot; and the tab content is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Power mode” has two settings: &amp;quot;Sleep&amp;quot;, Deep sleep&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Cut-off&amp;quot;. In cut-off mode, the WCU is not woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In sleep mode, some more settings are visible which also can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Power Management&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;External cut-off&amp;quot;, only available for the COMMITTO platform. In addition, you may enable the WCU&#039;s wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake-up cycle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to &amp;quot;deep sleep&amp;quot; for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode &amp;quot;sleep&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example: &#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).&lt;br /&gt;
This example is illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Perodic Wake-up&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible wake on a specific CAN frame ID. The settings are the same is for the canrecorder task. There it is possible to select one specific frame or several by separating them by “,”. It is also possible to select a range between frames by using “-”. The value can either be decimal or hexadecimal. A example of a filter: “1, 0x12-0xFF”&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--You can select the MCD-Hub to remain unpowered by selecting &amp;quot;MCD-hub cut-off&amp;quot;. In addition, you may enable the WCUs wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time” which indicates for how long I should be awake before going to sleep. The committo platform has some limits on the two settings and those are: minimum time to set between wake-ups is 10 minutes and the maximum time is 12 hours.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====WMU&#039;s Power Management====&lt;br /&gt;
If your Portal has [[WMU | WMU&#039;s]] enabled and you have added WMU&#039;s to the WCU Configuration in the [[I/O_configurations#Add_WMU(s) | I/O Configurations tab]], then the Power Management controls &amp;quot;Power Mode&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Wake on CAN&amp;quot; are present for each WMU with a tab of their own. These tabs are found at the top of the dialog window next to the WCU&#039;s Power Management tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Upload====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;upload tab wcu configuration&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Upload&amp;quot; and the tab content is described in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Mobile upload limit&lt;br /&gt;
| Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Post run grace timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the portal, if the ignition is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload timeout&lt;br /&gt;
| The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Erase error code&lt;br /&gt;
| If turned on the error codes in the vehicle will be reset.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at boot&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the WCU boots up.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | Upload data at ignition off&lt;br /&gt;
| Uploads data when the ignition of the vehicle is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Upload periodically&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Uploads data every 10 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====IO====&lt;br /&gt;
Version &amp;gt;= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Extra bundles====&lt;br /&gt;
[[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From portal version 2.47 and if the WCU is running 2.47 (or is about to be upgraded to 2.47) there is a new tab &amp;quot;Extra bundles&amp;quot; in the WCU configuration window, see Figure &amp;quot;Edit Configuration: Extra bundles&amp;quot;. In the tab, it is possible to select additional software to be installed on the WCU. The installation will start as soon as the WCU fetches the updated configuraton. This tab is only enabled if the current WCU is an MX4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Edit Vehicle Dialog===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration37.png|thumb|200px|right|Edit One Vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration38.png|thumb|200px|right|Edit Several Vehicles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Vehicle” button. The dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Edit One Vehicle&amp;quot; opens up.The one entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the portal to be able to translate Diagnostic Trouble Codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic trouble codes read out might be translated incorrectly or (more probable), not at all. It is also important to select the right type of vehicle using “Vehicle type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the vehicle. If the selected vehicle is connected to a WCU in a resource group, strict or not, this option is disabled. To enable it it either has to be disconnected from the WCU or the WCU must be excluded from its resource group. The “Active” check box controls whether the vehicle should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A vehicle can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated vehicle you must actively select to view inactivated vehicles. However, if the vehicle is connected to a WCU this option will be disabled from editing. In order to deactivate such a vehicle you need to first disconnect it from the WCU. It is possible to choose not to update history vehicles with the provided changes. This option should only used in specific cases and with a well grounded reason. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to update several vehicles at once by selecting multiple vehicles and then press the “Edit Vehicle” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes, except for the VIN and plate number, for all the selected vehicles at once. This is achieved using the extended dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;. The options which are to be edited for all vehicles must be selected using the corresponding checkbox. If not, the option is disabled, as for instance the &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot;-option in the &amp;quot;Edit Several Vehicles&amp;quot;-figure.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add Vehicle Dialog ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add-car-dialog.png|alt=add car dialog|thumb|Add Vehicle dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Save car response dialog.png|thumb|Response dialog when creating a new vehicle]]&lt;br /&gt;
Usually you do not have to create vehicles manually, they are created automatically by the WCU if they are not found. It is possible, however, to create a vehicle manually using the portal by pressing the button &amp;quot;Add Vehicle&amp;quot; in the vehicles panel. By doing so you will be presented with the dialog found on the right. Here you can set a number of attributes. Important to remember is that the field VIN is mandatory and must be unique among all vehicles registered on the portal. From version 2.57 of the portal the checkbox &amp;quot;Generate unique VIN&amp;quot; is present to the right of the input field VIN. By checking that box a unique VIN will be generated once you save the vehicle. The name consists of a prefix, which is centrally preconfigured, and a monotonically increasing integer number. After pressing save you will be presented with the following dialog (in the right below). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you have the opportunity to inspect the generated VIN and your other settings. You can either select to dismiss the dialog or go to the result which means that the newly created vehicle will be presented in the table in the vehicles panel.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Upload a Vehicle Import File===&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to import a file that describes a set of vehicles. It can consist of both new vehicles and vehicles already in the database that might need to be updated with new information.&lt;br /&gt;
A vehicle import file consists of a comma separated file where each line describes a vehicle. The first line of the file must look as follows:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are seven attributes currently. When uploading the file you have a choice of modifying existing vehicles in the portal. If you do not check this box and there are vehicles that already exist, the import will fail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Show or export SIM card ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting &amp;quot;Show info&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIM card ID&#039;s for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button &amp;quot;Export SIM card info&amp;quot; located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload WCU file ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU attributes &#039;WCU Name&#039; and &#039;WCU Comment&#039; can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the &amp;quot;Upload WCU File&amp;quot; button to open up the import file to upload dialog. Remember that this function is only for updating already existing WCUs, WCUs not existing cannot be added using this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The uploaded file has the following requirements:&lt;br /&gt;
* The file must have two mandatory columns with the names &#039;WCU ID&#039; and &#039;WCU Name&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Furthermore, an optional column named &#039;Comments&#039; can be added. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be in said order.&lt;br /&gt;
* The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. &lt;br /&gt;
* The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.&lt;br /&gt;
If there is a &#039;Comment&#039; column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload vehicle pins file Screenshot from 2023-06-28 15-22-22.png|thumb|Upload of a vehicle pin code file]]&lt;br /&gt;
ECU pin codes can be specific for a vehicle. This makes it possible to [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice284/index.php/Creating_a_Task#SWDL create an SWDL assignment] for multiple vehicles in one go. In order for this to work you must first prepare all such vehicles by uploading a file describing the different pin codes. When using the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; multiple vehicles can be described in one file. The format of such a file is  row based where each row should be &#039;&#039;&#039;vin;ecu;pin&#039;&#039;&#039;. The ecu field is the hexadecimal address the ECU. When pressing the button &amp;quot;Upload Vehicles pins&amp;quot; you will be presented with the dialog found to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Context-vehicle-pin-code-file.png|thumb|The context menu choice for uploading a ECU pin code file for a single vehicle.]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is also on option available with a context menu (right click a row) where a singe vehicle is targeted. The format of the file is the same except that no vin should be in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Shelve and Unshelve a WCU}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resource Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100&lt;br /&gt;
WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration&lt;br /&gt;
will be saved to all WCUs in one go. Resource groups are created in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Resource group|Resource groups panel]], described further below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUtoResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding Resources to Resource Group|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add a resource to a resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested in adding to a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are satisfied with your selection, press the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group”. Pressing this button will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two check boxes requires a deeper discussion. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU is registered on the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured the same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCU software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes pre-configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well. In order to do so, it is required that you also update the WCU-configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you leave the &amp;quot;Update WCU configuration&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Update module configuration&amp;quot; unchecked, that selection of only in this instant. If you later change the resource group configuration (or module configuration), that change will be applied to all resources in the group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConfirmMovingResourceToResourceGroup.png|thumb|Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group|right]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Moving a resource between resource groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
In this same dialog it is also possible to move WCUs between resource groups. Just as with adding a WCU to a resource group, select the WCU(s) you wish to move and press the &amp;quot;Add WCU(s) to resource group&amp;quot; button. If a WCU already belongs to a resource group, that resource group is listed in the grid alongside the WCU. Select the desired resource group you wish to move the WCU to, in the group box and press the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button. An information dialog will pop up, informing you that a WCU will move from one resource group to another. Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; to confirm the WCU moving to a new resource group or press &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; to return to the previous dialog. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddWCUToStrictResourceGroup.png|thumb|Adding/Moving WCU to Strict Resource Group.|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Requirements for moving or adding a resource to a strict resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
When adding or moving WCUs to a strict resource group, it is required that the WCU shares the same platform type (and platform subtype, should one exist) and that a car is connected to the WCU (see [[Strict resource group|strict resource groups]]). Furthermore, updating the WCU-configuration and the module configurations are mandatory and, as such, these options are set and not able to be changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modules for the WCU==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-09-10 15-34-09.png|alt=Tool configurations.|thumb|687x687px|Selecting Tool Configurations]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each WCU supports a number of modules. The modules are software components realizing specific functions, such as a measurement tool, a data source or software component. Some modules correspond to external measurement devices connected to the WCU, whereas other are built-in. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The set of currently available modules are:&lt;br /&gt;
# Area5&lt;br /&gt;
# Audio&lt;br /&gt;
# Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
# Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
# DLT&lt;br /&gt;
# DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
# ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
# Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS&lt;br /&gt;
# IDC&lt;br /&gt;
# IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
# LPD&lt;br /&gt;
# M-log&lt;br /&gt;
# MCD-Hub (deprecated)&lt;br /&gt;
# MQTT&lt;br /&gt;
# Rapid Prototyping (RP)&lt;br /&gt;
# Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
# Smart Eye&lt;br /&gt;
# Soft-Hub&lt;br /&gt;
# State of Health (SoH)&lt;br /&gt;
# Software Download (SWDL)&lt;br /&gt;
# Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
# Video&lt;br /&gt;
# Vinreader&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To deal with each module&#039;s configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Figure &amp;quot;The Administrator&#039;s Vehicles Tab&amp;quot; in [[#The Vehicles Tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Selecting Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there are a set of tools present where each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Show the Signal Reader settings by selecting the Signal Reader stack and select the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorder settings and so forth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Figure &amp;quot;Handling Tool Configurations&amp;quot; there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit description”. To reload the set of available tools  press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below each tool configuration there messages are presented to indicate the module status. The different types of which are presented in Figure &amp;quot;Module Status Indicators&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;200&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules no settings changed.png|Module Status Indicators&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings not saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules settings saved.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:Modules tool upgrade pending.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a module is selected, or reloaded, it will say &amp;quot;No settings saved&amp;quot;. In this mode the save-button is disabled and it will not be enabled until one of the settings is edited. Then the message &amp;quot;Settings not saved&amp;quot; appears until the save button is pressed. When the configuration is successfully saved, the status is updated to &amp;quot;Settings saved&amp;quot; and the Save-button is once again disabled. In addition, if there is a pending upgrade of the tool, this also will be indicated below the configuration panel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-09 10-54-55.png|thumb|Module status with information on when it was changed and by whom]]&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the module status indicator above, a date and user will show when the configuration was changed and by whom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Arcos Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ArcosNewModule.png|alt=Arcos-module|thumb|Arcos-module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.71 of the portal, Arcos tasks can be created and these are the configurations variables that can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
* Username&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Frontend number&lt;br /&gt;
*Current firmware&lt;br /&gt;
*Desired firmware&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Debug level]]&lt;br /&gt;
When configuring the module on a resource group level the username and password will be set on all resources in the resource group. The frontend number however, will not be updated on all the resources but rather retain the individual settings made on each resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; field to show the WCU software version needs to be 2.85.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Area5 Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.61 of the portal, it is possible to create Area5 tasks. The Area5 tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the Area5 tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Audio Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module can be configured both regarding &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. The recording settings refer to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring settings refer to the parameters used for monitoring live audio.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available recording settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Device&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to internal or USB, where default is internal&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to either 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo), default is 2&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to 48000, 44100, 16000 or 8000. Default is 48000. The unit is Hz.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Recording volume&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be set to a value between 0 and 100, where default is 95.&lt;br /&gt;
The available monitoring settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channels&#039;&#039;&#039;, 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo). Default is 1.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, LPCM, GSM or G.711. Default is LPCM (Linear PCM 16 bits per sample, 16 kHz).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is the address to where the audio is sent for live monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;. In order to monitor audio live for an audio task, the module must be enabled for monitoring. If the task is enabled for monitoring but the module is not, no audio can be monitored live. Default is disabled.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to have four audio sources simultaneously. To add a new source, simply press the button &amp;quot;Add audio source&amp;quot; and the corresponding settings will appear in a new tab. If there already is an audio source with device set to internal, the new device will have default device USB. However, if there is no previous device set to internal, this will be the default option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Blue piraT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.44 of the portal it is possible to create blue piraT tasks. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the [[debug level]], which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Canrecorder Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The configurable settings for the Canrecorder module can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Canrecorder module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules Canrecorder.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Canrecorder module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the aforementioned figure, it is clear that this panel can be used to edit the speed on both the high- and low-speed CAN-buses. It is also possible to set the date for which the update is valid, the canrecorder version and the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DLT Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version earlier than 2.72.0 the DLT module have two DLT-specific settings, one for the daemon address and one for the daemon port. Have a look [[DLT Module|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version 2.72.0 or later, the daemon addresses and ports (several daemons are supported from this version) are instead specified when creating a [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) task]]. The only thing specified in the module is the debug level - the level of logging from the WCU regarding its handling of this task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the DoIP Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In figure &amp;quot;Settings for the DoIP module&amp;quot; the configuration for the DoIP module is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy address:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy address for the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy port:&#039;&#039;&#039; The proxy port.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;ID:&#039;&#039;&#039; The ID of the DoIP module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Active session:&#039;&#039;&#039; Checkbox to let the DoIP module start announcing an ongoing synchronous diagnostic session. This is typically done by setting a LED on the WCU connected to the vehicle, signaling that a synchronous diagnostic session is ongoing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proxy address should usually be set to the localhost IP address 127.0.0.1 for technical reasons (it will be tunneled) and the proxy port number should usually be 6757. The ID is a textual string that identifies a particular user group that will gain access to the WCUs by configuring the client interface system with the same identifier. (This configuration is done at doipc install time.) All WCUs configured with the same ID will be reachable through the same client system interface. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules DoIP.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the DoIP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the ETAS Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the ETAS module&amp;quot; the configuration panel for the ETAS module is presented. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules ETAS.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the ETAS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to change the username and password as well as the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Ethernet capture module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-34-02.png|thumb|Settings for the Ethernet capture module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the File fetcher module ===&lt;br /&gt;
The only available setting here is [[debug level]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the GPS Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-36-42.png|thumb|Settings for the GPS module]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are four settings involved:&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
# GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IDC Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module can be configured with which CAN bus to communicate with the vehicle. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-10-19 10-17-38.png|none|thumb|Settings for the IDC module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.68.0 another option also exists where the file output format can be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the IPEmotion RT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module can be configured with SFTP port, username and password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the LPD Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module can be configured with a list of usernames. Each &amp;quot;Username&amp;quot; field represents one username in that list. Use the button next to the field to add another username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the M-log Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-21 16-11-28.png|alt=Settings for the M-log module|left|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the M-log module]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.75.0 of the M-log module there are two more fields present. They are &amp;quot;Current firmware&amp;quot; which is the last known firmware for the M-log logger. &amp;quot;Desired firmware&amp;quot; consists of a drop-down list a out-of-band firmware files present on the portal. Select one the files and the WCU will try to apply the firmware upgrade to the M-log as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The MCD-Hub module is deprecated and should not be used anymore. The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub. The other two configuration settings  are the preferred firmware version and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the MQTT Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The available settings for the MQTT Module is presented in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the MQTT module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules MQTT.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the MQTT module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This panel can be used to define an alternative host for the MQTT broker. Default is, as displayed in the illustration, localhost. Here you can also change the debug level for the module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the RP Module===&lt;br /&gt;
For this module it is only possible to configure modify the debug level, see Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration44.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the RP module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on how to use the RP module is found in the [[WICE RP Manual]] and the [[WICE RP How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Signal Reader Module===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal-reader-module-2.88.png|alt=Settings for the Signal Reader module|thumb|318x318px|Settings for the Signal Reader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time. For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor” illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Signal Reader module&amp;quot;. The monitoring can either be set as asynchronous or synchronous. In the former case, there is a regular signal communication with the portal and in the latter case with a specified destination port. For the synchronous case it is also possible to specify which transport protocol to use: TCP or UDP. The monitoring rate for both cases is set using the &amp;quot;Interval&amp;quot; field, where the default is once per second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also here it is possible to define the debug level. Further, the module settings include selecting whether or not the MDF files are to be written upon recorder stop and the version of the generated MDF file. In the sampling section there are two main choices; whether or not to record samples on change and enabling/disabling of piecewise linear approximation (PLA). If samples are to be recorded on change, it is possible to also choose to include one sample before the change. With the choice of PLA comes the option of defining the error percentage for the signal range and the maximum segment length in number of samples.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thereafter you can select whether to aggregate ReadDataByIdentifier (service 22) diagnostic requests and which channel that should be used as the default diagnostics channel. Default interface can be CAN or DoIP and will affect the assignment that has the interface &amp;quot;Default Channel&amp;quot; selected and also the DREC. It is also possible to enter appropriate values for the diagnostics timeout. The timeout values determine how long time to wait for diagnostic responses before assuming that there are none. Typically, the timeout for sequence file diagnostics is set to a higher value due to the fact that it doesn&#039;t negatively impact the update frequency of active (diagnostics) signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.88.0 it is possible to select the MDF4 format when logging frames.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the SmartEye Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The configuration for this module is identical to that of the RP module, depicted in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Soft-Hub===&lt;br /&gt;
As for the RP and Smarteye module, its only editable parameter is the debug level using a panel as displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the RP module&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the State of Health Module===&lt;br /&gt;
The state of health module has the same settings as the IDC module above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Software Download Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SWDL module has the same settings as the IDC module above apart from one difference highlighted in red in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Software Download Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modules SWDL.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Software Download Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs of version 2.53 and forward it is possible to allow updates to be performed without manual interaction by checking the high-lighted checkbox. If this option is chosen, the updates will instead be performed as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configure the Uptime Module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running and its configuration is set using the panel displayed in Figure &amp;quot;Settings for the Uptime Module&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration43.png|thumb|left|250px|Settings for the Uptime Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” checkbox. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Video Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
A description of how to configure the video module can be found here. An explanation of the module in more general terms is found in the [[WICE video]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The video module can be configured both regarding the recording and the monitoring. The recording parameters refers to what is recorded on the WCU to disc to be uploaded, whereas the monitoring parameters refer to the live video that is streamed from the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;recording&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the recorded video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when recording video clips to disc. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8. (Note that the video that is uploaded to the portal is typically transcoded to MPEG-4 format, and codec only refers to the recording phase in the WCU.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip size&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the size in seconds or bytes of clips recorded on the WCU. The clips are subsequently concatenated on the Portal, if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Clip unit&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the unit for the clip size setting (bytes or seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available &#039;&#039;&#039;monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable monitoring&#039;&#039;&#039;, which enables or disables monitoring of video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the width in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the height in pixels of the monitored video.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frame rate&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the number of video frames per second to be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codec&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the video codec used when streaming monitored video. Avaliable codecs are JPEG and VP8.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination IP address&#039;&#039;&#039;, which is the IP address to which monitored video is transmitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a setting for rotating the video, to be used if the camera is installed upside-down or at a 45 degree angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configure the Vinreader Module ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 08-59-33.png|alt=Settings for the Vinreader module|thumb|250x250px|Settings for the Vinreader module]]&lt;br /&gt;
The method of reading a vehicle&#039;s VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) can be set to &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA29&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;OBD2&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;SPA11, BP, TEA2+, UDS, DoIP&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;FIXED&#039;&#039;&#039;. The preferred setting for this is OBD2, whereby a standardized OBD-II diagnostic service is used to read out the VIN. SPA29 and SPA11 refers to using CAN diagnostic requests using either 29 bit or 11 bit SPA addressing respectively. The CAN channel (on the WCU) is selected in &#039;Default CAN channel&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the setting FIXED is used, the VIN will not be read out from the vehicle using a diagnostic service, but rather a preset value entered in the item named &#039;Fixed VIN&#039; is used. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-09-21.png|alt=Vehicle ID method type|thumb|Vehicle ID method type]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-22 09-55-55.png|alt=No identifying label selected|thumb|No identifying label selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Skärmavbild 2019-12-18 kl. 15.17.58.png|thumb|Audio module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;Save VIN&#039; is a checkbox for save vin. As default the box is checked which means that it will save the VIN number if the WCU can successfully read it. If the &#039;Save VIN&#039; is unchecked then the WCU will try to read the VIN number every time it boots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently two ways of identifying a vehicle, either by reading the VIN or the chassis number. The selection is shown in Illustration &#039;Vehicle ID method type&#039; to the right. When using &#039;Chassis NO&#039; as identification type you must select which valued label to use for this mechanism. If no such label has been selected, you will see the the text &#039;No label selected in backend&#039; to the right of the selected type, see Illustration &#039;No identifying label selected&#039; on the right. To select which label to use, head over to the [[Labels#Administer labels|label administration tab]] to make the selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Administration Tab==&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups”, “Users”, &amp;quot;Labels&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;WCU Status&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Key Figures&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Connect Car to WCU Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To archive which vehicle a specific WCU was in at the time a task was run can be done by connecting a vehicle to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching vehicles, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the vehicle you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To connect a WCU with a vehicle you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the vehicle in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and vehicle are connected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new &amp;quot;Connect&amp;quot; button located between the two grids.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.&lt;br /&gt;
See Figure &amp;quot;Connect Cars to WCU&amp;quot; for an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration 45.png|thumb|frame|left|600px|Connect Cars to WCU]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Resource Groups Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;Resource Group Tab&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resource-groups-administration.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Resource Group Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Add and Remove Resource Groups====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateNewResourceGroup.png|thumb|Add Resource Group Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Here you can type the name for the new resource group, set the resource group as strict (see [[Strict resource group|Strict Resource Groups]]) and, if you choose to set the resource group as strict, set what platform type and platform sub type it should have. When you feel satisfied with your selections press “Create” to create the resource group. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Copy Resource group ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have set up the configuration for a resource group it is sometimes convenient to make a copy of the resource group under a new name. To do this, select the resource group you would like to copy and press &amp;quot;Copy resource group&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Default labels ====&lt;br /&gt;
Default labels are a group of labels that will be associated with WCU or/and vehicle when a WCU joins a resource group. These labels will not affect current WCU/Vehicles in the resource group. To edit the set of labels press the “Edit default labels” button. New window will show. Read more about the edit default labels window [[Edit default labels window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Approved Assignments ====&lt;br /&gt;
You can require that assignments must have been reviewed and approved before they can be applied to a resource group by checking the box &amp;quot;Require Approved Assignments&amp;quot;. If an assignment does not meet these criteria, the assignment will not be applied to the resource group. Read more about the assignment review process [[Review assignment process|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====&lt;br /&gt;
In the right hand table in Figure &amp;quot;Manipulating Resources in Resource Group&amp;quot;, you see a set of resources for a resource group. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rg.png|left|thumb|800x800px|Manipulating Resources in Resource Group]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Status”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Status” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the color in the column will be green. The value is updated each 30 seconds. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The different color values are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Red ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration was edited after the resource group&#039;s configuration was saved. The WCU will never use the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Yellow ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU&#039;s configuration is the same as the resource group&#039;s but the WCU has not yet updated to this configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Green ===== &lt;br /&gt;
The WCU has updated to the resource group&#039;s configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group&#039;s, see Figure &amp;quot;Dialog: WCU Moved to Another Resource Group&amp;quot; in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU&#039;s configuration rather than the group&#039;s configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Vehicle Profiles Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Alarm Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is further described [[Alarm|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The User Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration46.png|border|800x800px]]The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in the Figure &amp;quot;User Administration Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
The nine columns are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;User ID&#039;&#039;&#039;. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;. The name of the user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Roles&#039;&#039;&#039;. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039;&#039;. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Email Address&#039;&#039;&#039;. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Last login date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date when the user last logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Two factor auth&#039;&#039;&#039;. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Logged in&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can see if the user is currently logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Creation Date&#039;&#039;&#039;. The date of when the user was created. Only visible on users created after December 3 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:&lt;br /&gt;
# The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user&#039;s password.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit roles and permissions&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.&lt;br /&gt;
# Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The New User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing the “New User” button the dialog appears as presented in Figure &amp;quot;New User Dialog&amp;quot;. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Add the roles that you want the user to have by moving roles from the left list to the right. You can hover each role to view more information about them. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”. If you click &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; and the roles you have selected gives the user access to some wcus tasks, you will also be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well. This can also be done when editing the roles of a user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the new user has been created, that user is granted a default minimalistic view in both the Tasks- and Vehicles-panel. This mechanism exists to prevent new users from being overwhelmed by the large amount of columns available in these panels. Instead, they are only presented with the most important columns, with the option to see more columns if they want to. The default columns for new users are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Tasks panel&lt;br /&gt;
** Task ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment name&lt;br /&gt;
** Assignment type&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** Status&lt;br /&gt;
** Task creator&lt;br /&gt;
** Creation date&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
* Vehicles panel&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU ID&lt;br /&gt;
** VIN&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU comment&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU software version&lt;br /&gt;
** WCU connection time&lt;br /&gt;
** Resource group&lt;br /&gt;
** Active alarms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NewUserDialog252.png|left|thumb|New User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PromptNewUserCurAss.png|left|thumb|Prompt to give user permission to currently running tasks on specified wcus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Edit User Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Figure &amp;quot;Modify User Dialog&amp;quot;. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”. Advice the user to install &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot; on their phone before they login to the portal for the first time as the secret will only be shown once and must be installed in the authenticator app at that time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just like when adding a new user, you can give or remove roles to the user by clicking &amp;quot;Edit user roles&amp;quot; and moving roles from the left list to the right and vice versa. If you edit the user roles to add some wcu task permission to the user, you will also here be prompted about giving the user access to currently running tasks on these wcus as well.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditUser252.png|left|thumb|Modify User Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Change Password Dialog====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change a user&#039;s password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog below will appear. It is pretty straightforward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|left|Change Password Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The Show Secret Window====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|QR-code Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app (we recommend using &amp;quot;Google Authenticator&amp;quot;), point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;QR-code Window&amp;quot;. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Edit User Roles and Permissions ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here it is also possible to edit user roles and permissions, read further instructions [[Roles and permissions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Labels Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
This tab is used to administer labels. Here you can enable/disable labels, rename labels which are not system labels and it is possible to make private labels global. If the feature is enabled at your site, it is also possible to configure label announcements here. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More about these functions can be found in [[Labels#Administer labels|Administer Labels]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The WCU Status Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.47 the WCU status tab has changed. See [[WCU Status]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The Following applies to portal version 2.46 and older:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This view is supposed to be used for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision is done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The set of status information collected comprises three parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General information:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Alive, a heart beat signal&lt;br /&gt;
* Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
** 4G&lt;br /&gt;
** 3G&lt;br /&gt;
** 2G&lt;br /&gt;
** none&lt;br /&gt;
* Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Storage Usage:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Collection Status:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A view of the panel is depicted in the Figure &amp;quot;WCU Status Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|WCU Status Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Key Figures Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this tab it is possible to view charts over recorded statistics for the portal. More about this option is found under [[Key Figures]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Resource-groups-administration.png&amp;diff=3809</id>
		<title>File:Resource-groups-administration.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Resource-groups-administration.png&amp;diff=3809"/>
		<updated>2024-12-17T09:32:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Admin resource g&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&amp;diff=3800</id>
		<title>Creating a Task</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&amp;diff=3800"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T13:16:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* DLT UDS Mode */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;== Creating a Task==&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You create a new task by pressing the &amp;quot;New Task&amp;quot; button on the bottom of the &amp;quot;Tasks&amp;quot; tab. This will open a window where you choose the type of task you want to create. Note that it is not possible to create a new task for a WCU which has the system labels &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;shelving_in_progress&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;shelving_done&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;. However, if the WCU has the latter label, it is possible to unshelve it using the corresponding button in the bottom of the Vehicle-tab.  Here we will go through how to create tasks of each of the different kinds of tasks available. Remember that not all of the task types will be available as this depends on customer configuration and some types might not be enabled in the portal. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn about how to add resources to the task, check [[New task|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Arcos ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arcos-task.png|alt=The dialog for creating an Arcos task.|thumb|The dialog for creating an Arcos task.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. From version 2.71 the portal can interact with the Arcos-logger from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The file should have the extension &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.ccmc&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. When the task is downloaded the WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the Arcos - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since version 2.79.0 Arcos tasks can now have software version validation in the same manner as described for the M-Log task (see [[Creating a Task#Software version validation (Available from version 2.74.0)|Software version validation]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Area5 ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Area5 new task.png|thumb|500x500px|Area5 task]]&lt;br /&gt;
Area5 tasks are used to read out data from the memory of ECUs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment:&#039;&#039;&#039; To create a new Area5 task you first have to create an Area5 assignment in the [[Area5 Assignment Editor|Area5 Assignment Editor]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Validate ECU SW version on WCU:&#039;&#039;&#039; By checking this box, the WCU will validate that the ECU SW version of the task and the actual ECU are the same before starting the task. If they are different, it will not start the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger Expression:&#039;&#039;&#039; The task can be started by an expression. This option lets the user specify start trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). For an explanation of trigger conditions look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sync Signal:&#039;&#039;&#039; It is possible to specify a signal with given values that will be sent when the Area5 task starts and stops. This can be used to synchronize the Area5 read-out with external measurements systems like the M-Log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Audio ==&lt;br /&gt;
An audio task makes it possible to record audio from a connected microphone. An audio recording can be started in five ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger button&#039;&#039;&#039;: to initiate the recording you need to attach a button to the WCU in order to start in the audio recording.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Signal reader&#039;&#039;&#039;: initiate the recording by a trigger expression in a Signal Reader assignment. The recording is started as soon as a Signal Reader &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; is started. You specify the name of the Signal Reader recorder (e.g. SREC_0) you want to start the audio recording. You can also enter &amp;quot;auto&amp;quot; as the recorder name, in which case a recorder that include the Audio_Device_n internal signal will be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039;: Similar to the &#039;Signal reader&#039; trigger option, the &#039;Expression&#039; option lets the user specify start and stop trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). Unlike the &#039;Signal Reader&#039; trigger, there does not have to be a recorder configured in the Signal Reader measurement assignment. For an explanation of triggers look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Audio level&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the trigger once the microphone registers volume above a certain threshold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;: start the recording as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to this, you can set the &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-trig&#039;&#039;&#039; time which is only valid in the cases of trigger button, signal reader, expression and audio level above. As an example, let&#039;s assume the trigger button method is selected. At the moment the trigger button is pressed the audio has already been recorded for the number of seconds specified. This can be handy when you press the trigger button to make a comment about an event where the event was audible.[[File:Skärmavbild 2019-12-18 kl. 14.28.52.png|alt=Audio task|thumb|Audio task]]A maximum &#039;&#039;&#039;duration&#039;&#039;&#039; of the recording can also be set, in seconds from the start trigger event. If there is a stop trigger expression specified, the recording will be stopped either when the stop expression is fulfilled or the max duration is passed, whichever occurs first. If you do not enter a duration it will be set to a default value of 120 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to monitor the audio live. To do this, check the box &amp;quot;Monitoring&amp;quot;. To listen to the live audio you should use a tool such as [http://confero.alkit.se Alkit Confero]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is more information about audio in WICE [[Wice audio|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio tasks can be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Blue piraT ==&lt;br /&gt;
The blue PiraT is a measurement system from Telemotive AG that can be configured with measurement set-ups, and data accessed through the WICE Portal. Note that to use the blue PiraT module, the WCUs to be used need to be preconfigured with a special software package (i.e. an &amp;quot;extra bundle&amp;quot;). Contact Alkit Communications in order to set this up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CAN-recorder ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canrecorder.png|thumb|Canrecorder]]&lt;br /&gt;
Canrecorder is a measurement module that allows CAN frames to be captured and logged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the grid, select which bus (or buses) to record from. By clicking below active column or select a row and click on “Toggle” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To apply filters on specific CAN buses, select a row and click on “Edit filter”. There it is possible to select one specific frame or several by separating them by “,”. It is also possible to select a range between frames by using “-”. The value can either be decimal or hexadecimal. A example of a filter: “1, 0x12-0xFF”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Below the grid settings for how long the recording should be and how many shots. If not using shot count, infinite result files will be created as long as the units are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Scheduling=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with version &amp;gt;= 2.53 this task can be scheduled by selecting the &amp;quot;Add schedule&amp;quot;-checkbox. By doing so, the panel shown in Figure &amp;quot;Schedule Panel&amp;quot; appears. By thereafter selecting the &amp;quot;ASAP&amp;quot; checkbox, the task will be performed once and as soon as possible. If instead the task is to be performed at a specified time, deselect the &amp;quot;Time span&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot;-checkboxes and select the sought time in the &amp;quot;Start field&amp;quot;. The task can also be performed within a certain time span, and in this case &amp;quot;Time span&amp;quot; should be checked and the Date in &amp;quot;End&amp;quot; field specified. Repetition of the task is defined by checking the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; checkbox, defining a interval size in the field after &amp;quot;Every&amp;quot; and a recurrence rate in the drop down menu. The task will then be repeated at this rate until the date defined in the &amp;quot;Until&amp;quot; field is reached. By selecting the &amp;quot;On ignition&amp;quot; checkbox, the task will be performed once on ignition. If delay is above 0 then the task will be performed once the configured amount of seconds have passed after ignition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration Schedule.png|thumb|left|600px|Schedule Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scheduling on ignition.png|thumb|300x300px|Schedule Panel with &#039;On ignition&#039; enabled]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To control the time zone in which the task scheduling is to be performed the &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot;-checkbox is used. If this option is deselected, the task will be performed in UTC-time (the date fields present the portal local time). On the other hand, if this box is checked, the task will be performed according to the local time zone predefined for the WCU. A WCU time zone can be defined for a WCU with version &amp;gt;= 2.53 by an administrator using &amp;quot;Edit configuration&amp;quot; in the [[The Portal Administrator View#The Vehicles Tab|Vehicles panel]]. This is useful when there is a need to perform a certain task at a specific time of the day regardless of which country the vehicle is in. For instance, when selecting 100 different WCUs scheduled to perform a task at 10:00, checking the &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot;-checkbox will result in them performing the task according to their time zone setting. Without checking this option, the task will be performed in the corresponding UTC-time, which could mean in the middle of the day or night depending on where the vehicle is located.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) ==&lt;br /&gt;
The DLT functionality comes in two flavors. One is based on communicating with a DLT daemon on the ECU and the other is based on the UDS service 38. From version 2.92.0 the latter is also supported. You switch between the using the button &amp;quot;DLT UDS mode&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DLT Daemon Mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
DLT itself provides a log and trace interface, based on the standardized protocol specified in the AUTOSAR standard 4.0 DLT. A DLT task in the WICE Portal makes it possible to collect such logs in a vehicle where this functionality is available and transfer the data to the WICE portal where logs can be downloaded for further analysis. For a more in-depth description, you can go [https://github.com/GENIVI/dlt-daemon here]. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dlt-daemon.png|thumb|The DLT new task dialog for the daemon mode.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Basically the WCU is connecting to one or more DLT Daemons and unique filters can be applied to each daemon, filtering out specific log messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So when creating a DLT task on WCUs with software version 2.72.0 or later the number of daemons can be specified and for each daemon the following needs to be specified:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Daemon address - the IP-address in order for the WCUs DLT client to find the daemon.&lt;br /&gt;
# Daemon port - which port on the address the daemon is at.&lt;br /&gt;
# Filter configurations - filter expressions to be applied on the log messages. If left empty no filter is applied. For an explanation on how to write filter expressions, see [https://github.com/GENIVI/dlt-daemon#learn-more here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Older WCUs ====&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version earlier than 2.72.0 only one daemon is supported and only filters can be configured when creating a DLT task. To specify the daemon address and port go to the [[DLT Module]] instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DLT UDS Mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
When in this mode the user is presented with a list of directories to handle. Each row in the table is for a specific WCU and directory, as indicated in the illustration for the UDS mode to the right. To add a row, or directory to fetch, press the button &amp;quot;Add transfer&amp;quot;. An editable row shows up in the table where you can enter data. Enter the ECU ID as hexadecimal number, an optional pin code (more on this later) and the directory to fetch. You can add as many entries as you wish.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dlt-uds-task.png|thumb|DLT UDS service 38 task]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is a check box with the text &amp;quot;Use vehicle specific PINs&amp;quot;. By checking the box, the system will try to get a vehicle specific PIN code for each ECU and WCU. The type of PIN for this service is area 19. How to supply the system with such PIN codes is described [[Vehicles#Upload Vehicle pins|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ETAS ==&lt;br /&gt;
Through an ETAS task, an ETAS ES720 Drive Recorder system can be configured, and measurement data offloaded and accessed through the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an ETAS task, the task description file you select must be a .exp file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ethernet capture ==&lt;br /&gt;
This kind of task is used to capture packet data from one of the ethernet interfaces on the WCU. The basics for this kind of task is that you choose the interface you would like to capture from and a capture expression to filter which packets you are interested in. The results from this task type is pcap files. To read more about this task type, go [[Ethernet capture|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File fetcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:File fetcher proxy example.png|thumb|The new task dialog of the File fetcher task.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The File fetcher task fetches files from a specified unit and makes them available for downloading in the Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following needs to be specified when creating such a task:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;File path&#039;&#039;&#039; - One or several paths to a files or file-containing directories on the unit&#039;s file system. This specifies which files that will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;IP address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Port&#039;&#039;&#039; -  To find the unit. Default is 22, but can be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the task also allows the use of a proxy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use a proxy, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Use Proxy&#039;&#039;&#039; checkbox has to be checked, and the following must be specified:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the proxy unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the proxy unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy IP Address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the proxy unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy Port&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the proxy unit. Default is 22, but can be changed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== IDC ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC) is a measurement module that allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent and responses recorded. The sequence of diagnostic requests can be created as an assignment in the Assignment tab, alternatively can be uploaded to the portal as a text file (usually ending with &amp;quot;.seq&amp;quot;). This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IPEmotion RT ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. From version 2.72 the portal can interact with the logger IPEmotion RT from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The file should have the extension &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.irf&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. When the task is downloaded the WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the IPEmotion RT - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since version 2.79.0 IPEmotion RT tasks can now have software version validation in the same manner as described for the M-Log task (see [[Creating a Task#Software version validation (Available from version 2.74.0)|Software version validation]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LPD ==&lt;br /&gt;
This type of task is ultimately handled by a separate App in an iPhone or iPad. The WICE system simply makes this task available to the App through a REST interface running on the WCU. The task consists of a specially crafted excel file. When the file is uploaded to the WICE portal it is validated to make sure that it can be read by the App.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2023-05-24 16-09-55.png|thumb|View an LPD task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot-edit-lpd.png|thumb|Upload opportunity after pressing the Edit button]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.83.0 of the WICE portal the task measurement file can be updated via the View Task function in the Tasks tab and a dialog as shown to the right will appear. By pressing the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button in the lower right corner, you will be presented with the possibility to upload a new measurement task file. This is shown with a red triangle in the illustration on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M-Log ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. One such logger is called M-Log from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.[[File:MlogForWiki.png|thumb|M-Log task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-21 09-34-11.png|alt=Entering ECU software version|thumb|Entering ECU software version]]&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the MLOG - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Software version validation (Available from version 2.74.0) ====&lt;br /&gt;
The measurement assignment for an MLOG is created using an external tool to WICE. An assignment is created with a certain version of the ECU software in mind for each ECU in the assignment. In order for the assignment to work it might be important that the ECU software version in the vehicle matches the software version of the ECU it was created for. In WICE, you can ask the system to read the current software version for each ECU which is stored and can be viewed, e.g. via the [[ECU List|ECU list]]. As WICE cannot know which software versions the assignment was created for, the user can supply this to WICE. By doing that, WICE can validate the entered software versions against what has been read out for each vehicle and thus aid the user in making sure that an assignment will work once it will run. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make the validation possible the user enters a ECU by its address, not the name. To help find out the address for an ECU you can go to the [[ECU List|ECU list]] to find the address of a specific ECU. Have a look at the illustration, Entering ECU software version, to see where in the dialog this is entered. On the top you enter the ECU address on the left and what software version is expected on the right. When satisfied, press the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button. The data you just entered will be added to the table and evaluated against what the WICE system has read out from the vehicle. In the example to the right something is incorrect which is indicated by the yellow color. To see the exact reason, simply use the cursor to see the specific message. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A negative validation in not enforced in the sense that you cannot run the assignment but rather an indication that it might not work as expected. You can always go ahead and press &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== MQTT ==&lt;br /&gt;
A MQTT task makes it possible to record data from a MQTT message broker, by specifying a specific topic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rapid prototyping ==&lt;br /&gt;
A Rapid prototyping (RP) task makes it possible to download RP binaries to multiple WCUs and keep track of the result files the RP task might produce. For more information about RP, see [[WICE RP How-To]] and [[WICE RP Manual]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rapid prototyping task.png|thumb|Rapid prototyping task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The rapid prototyping tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Rapid prototyping task&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An RP task must consist of at least an &#039;RP binary&#039; or a &#039;Web application zip file&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SoftHub ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SoftHub is a measurement system that can be run either as a stand alone unit or as a software module on the WCU, with functionality similar to the Signal Reader module. A SoftHub task is created much in the same way as a Signal Reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a SoftHub task, you select a .shub task file, and then proceed in the same way as the Signal Reader task. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SoftHub task will generate result files. It may be interesting to know if certain signals reach certain values in these result files, therefore it is possible to add &#039;&#039;&#039;server triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; to the task that will trigger and add a suitable label to the corresponding result file. Read more about this [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader == &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration SignalReader.png|thumb|271x271px|Signal reader task]]&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader is a data capture module that allows monitoring and logging of CAN and FlexRay signals, as well as diagnostics data, and ECU-internal signals read by CCP or XCP. To create a Signal Reader task you proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. You either select an assignment file of .haf format, or choose an assignment created in the assignment creator (see [[Signal Reader Assignment Wizard]]). Your current choice will be displayed in the &amp;quot;Chosen file&amp;quot; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When you have selected an assignment and one or more WCUs, the CAN buses defined in the assignment and on the WCU will be mapped. If they can be automatically mapped a green check symbol will be displayed, otherwise a red cross will be displayed. Clicking the mapping button will open the mapper. In the pop-up window you will have to map the different buses to each other manually and then save. Once this is done correctly, the red cross will become a green check mark, indicating that the mappings are ready to be automatically applied upon submit. Read more about this in [[I/O configurations]] and [[Mappings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. With a Signal Reader task you can monitor CAN, FlexRay, ODB-II and WCU-internal signals live by selecting &amp;quot;Monitor signals&amp;quot;. When selected, two boxes will appear under the task description. In the left one you search for signals and drag them over to the right one where the signals to be monitored are listed. You can later see the monitored signals by pressing the &#039;&#039;&#039;Monitor Signals&#039;&#039;&#039; button either in the Tasks tab or in the Vehicles tab. It is also possible to copy the signals text in the bottom right corner of the right box. Next to the copy text button you can also paste signals as text where the pasted signal names will be matched against the list of unselected signals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. You can choose if you want the signals to have their data source names as a prefix (e.g. CAN1.EngineSpeed instead of EngineSpeed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. The Signal Reader task will generate result files. It may be interesting to know if certain signals reach certain values in these result files, therefore it is possible to add &#039;&#039;&#039;Server Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; to the assignment that will trigger and add a suitable label to the corresponding result file. Read more about this [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Signal reader task can be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Signal Broker === &lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader can act as a Signal Broker for other software components. For instance, the audio and video modules relies on the Signal Broker API of Signal Reader for evaluating start and stop trigger expressions. Moreover, the Signal Broker gives programmatical access to signals for Rapid Prototyping tasks.  Read more about this in [[WICE Signal Broker API]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Files containing references to sequence files === &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SequenceFileForSignalreader.png|thumb|right|Sequence Files References in .haf File]] &lt;br /&gt;
If the measurement file contains references to sequence files, you are also required to select these in order to run the task. The portal scans the .haf file for such entries and presents this to you, see illustration 4.2. Click the button for each sequence file reference to upload each sequence file needed. Some requests in the sequence file may be for reading DTCs, and in such cases you can select the option of also reading associated &#039;&#039;Snapshots&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;. An example of this can found in Figure &amp;quot;Sequence Files References in .haf File&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SequenceFilesForSignalreaderWithFunctionalQuery.png|thumb|right|Sequence File with Functional Query]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the .haf file contained two references to sequence files. As no sequence files have yet been uploaded, the selection for reading snapshot or extended data is grayed out. In Figure &amp;quot;Sequence File with Functional Query&amp;quot; we have selected one such sequence file containing (functional) DTC requests. Here we have checked that we would like to read &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;. It is also possible to select both &#039;&#039;Snapshots&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WICE internal signals ===&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to CAN and FlexRay signals, a number of internal signals (i.e. internal to the WCU) are also available. The following WICE-internal signals are supported: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SoH ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-43-34.png|thumb|799x799px|SoH]]&lt;br /&gt;
A State of Health (SoH) task collects specific status information from vehicles. You select which information you want the task to collect by filling in one or more of the checkboxes shown in Figure &amp;quot;SoH&amp;quot;. The number of checkboxes shown can vary depending on the WICE installation. In order for SoH data to be correctly interpreted, relevant description files (e.g. SDDB) for the vehicles executing the SoH task may have to been available. To add such a description file for a vehicle, see [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog|The Edit Car Dialog]].The six different options are:&lt;br /&gt;
*Mileage&lt;br /&gt;
*Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
*Read ECU software numbers&lt;br /&gt;
*Read ECU DTC:s (optionally including &#039;Snapshot&#039; and &#039;Extended data&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
*Read OBD-II PIDs&lt;br /&gt;
*App Diagnotstic Db Part Num&lt;br /&gt;
*DM1, Diagnostic Message using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Odometer, reading the odometer using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]] (available from WCU version 2.63)&lt;br /&gt;
*Clear DTCs. &lt;br /&gt;
**If reading DTCs is requested as well, those will be read before clearing the DTCs. (available from WCU version 2.63)&lt;br /&gt;
**If this option (Clear DTC) is chosen it is optionally possible to set a PIN code for unlocking a gateway module - e.g. Vehicle Gateway Module (VGM). (Available from WCU version 2.66)&lt;br /&gt;
*Engine hours, reading engine hours using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]] (available from WCU version 2.64). The result for this can be read in the generated j1939-file from the task. It is a text type of file. In addition, a system value label called &#039;engine_hours&#039; (as default, can be changed on a customer basis). This label shows the latest read value and is available on the vehicle.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some selections above might not be available to you as this is a configuration setting depending on customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SWDL ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Swdl task Screenshot from 2023-06-28 14-50-55.png|thumb|791x791px|New SWDL task]]&lt;br /&gt;
A Software Download (SWDL) task updates the ECU software in one or more ECUs in one or more vehicles. A number of Versatile Binary Format (VBF) files containing the ECU software need to be supplied, along with PIN codes to allow security access to re-program the ECUs. The PIN codes should be in the format of five hexadecimal numbers, e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ff:00:1a:2c:77&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or alternatively, omitting the colon separator, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ff001a2c77&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;). When a SWDL task has been created and assigned to one or more WCUs, it will cause all vbf files to be downloaded to the WCUs, and then the actual re-programming can be triggered by the vehicle user through the WCU status GUI web interface. The uploaded vbf-files are presented in a table along with its ECU and software part type (SW part type). In a separate table, the PIN codes for each ECU are presented along with the total number of files uploaded per WCU, see Figure &amp;quot;New SWDL task&amp;quot;. To get an overview of how the files relate to the ECUs it is possible to choose the &amp;quot;Group by&amp;quot;-option when right clicking the ECU column in the file table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include a &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-update sequence file and/or a post-update sequence file&#039;&#039;&#039;. The diagnostic requests of those sequence files will be sent before and after the ECU re-programming respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include one &#039;&#039;&#039;signature file&#039;&#039;&#039; (containing checksums). The file is assumed to be an xml file. (Available from WCU version 2.66) If either of the optional files is selected, a field will appear to the right of the chosen file. This field will contain the name of the chosen file. (Available from WCU version 2.70)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include a &#039;&#039;&#039;VGM unlock&#039;&#039;&#039; access control mechanism, with a PIN code for the VGM node. This is specifically for vehicles requiring this kind of access control for ECU re-programming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By checking the box &#039;&#039;&#039;Run SoH after completion&#039;&#039;&#039; it is possible to let the SWDL task run the WCUs SoH task after the SWDL task is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like to use any individual ECU pin codes for a vehicle, make sure to check the box &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Vehicle Pin mappings&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. If a pin code for the ECU targeted by a vbf file, the pin code for the vehicle will be used. If no such pin code is found, the one entered in the right hand side table is used. Read more on how to prepare a vehicle with pin codes [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger Expression&#039;&#039;&#039; which must be fulfilled within a specified time limit (&amp;quot;Wait time&amp;quot;) for ECU re-programming to be allowed. The trigger expression follows the same syntax as Signal Reader trigger expressions (or [[Server Trigger|Server Triggers]], audio/video triggers), and should be built up from signals being measured in a Signal Reader assignment. The user must make sure that there is a Signal Reader assignment on the WCUs of the SWDL task, with the signals of the trigger expression being measured.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to choose to &#039;&#039;&#039;ignore checksums&#039;&#039;&#039; and/or &#039;&#039;&#039;disable pre-programming&#039;&#039;&#039; using the corresponding checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SWDL module can be [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Software Download Module|configured]] to perform SWDL either over CAN or over Ethernet (DoIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
A video task makes it possible to record and monitor live video from one or two cameras attached to a WCU. You can trigger recording of video in four ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger button&#039;&#039;&#039;: To initiate the recording you need to attach a button to the WCU in order to start in the video recording.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Signal reader&#039;&#039;&#039;: Initiate the recording when a recorder in a Signal Reader assignment starts. The recording is started as soon as a Signal Reader &#039;&#039;recorder&#039;&#039; is started. You specify the name of the Signal Reader recorder (e.g. SREC_0) you want to start the video recording. You can also enter &amp;quot;auto&amp;quot; as the recorder name, in which case a recorder that include the Video_Device_n internal signal will be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039;: Similar to the &#039;Signal reader&#039; trigger option, the &#039;Expression&#039; option lets the user specify start and stop trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). Unlike the &#039;Signal Reader&#039; trigger, there does not have to be a recorder configured in the Signal Reader measurement assignment. For an explanation of how to enter triggers, have a look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;: start the recording as soon as possible. (Use this with caution, since it tends to produce prohibitively large video files.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to this, you can set the &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-trig&#039;&#039;&#039; time (not valid in the cases of the &#039;None&#039; trigger option above). As an example, let&#039;s assume the trigger button method is selected. At the moment the trigger button is pressed the video has already been recorded for the number of seconds specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A maximum &#039;&#039;&#039;duration&#039;&#039;&#039; of the recording can also be set, in seconds from the start trigger event. If there is a stop trigger expression specified, the recording will be stopped either when the stop expression is fulfilled or the max duration is passed, whichever occurs first. If you do not enter a duration it will be set to a default value of 120 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If monitoring of video from a WCU is enabled, a live video stream will be transmitted which can be viewed using a RTP-based video tool, for instance [http://confero.alkit.se Alkit Confero]. This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about the video support in WICE [[WICE_video|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applicable for all types ==&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled at your site, there might be an opportunity to announce to third party applications that a result file is available using a [[wikipedia:Jakarta_Messaging|JMS API]]. By checking this box, as soon as a result file is added in the back-end this will be signaled using a customer specific event. The check box title is &amp;quot;Announce result file availability&amp;quot;, this can be seen in the image in [[#SoH|SoH]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Site specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Announce result file availability ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resultfilepanel.png|thumb|Announced On column]]&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled at your site, there might be an opportunity to announce to third party applications that a result file is available using a [[wikipedia:Jakarta_Messaging|JMS API]]. By checking this box, as soon as a result file is added in the back-end this will be signaled using a customer specific event. The check box title is &amp;quot;Announce result file availability&amp;quot;, this can be seen in the image in [[#SoH|SoH]]. Starting from version 2.87.0, there&#039;s a new &#039;Announced On&#039; column that keeps track of when the result file was announced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Retention time ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Retention time.png|thumb|435x435px|Retention time]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works by setting a retention time in days which simply says that data coming in from the task, i.e. result files and positions will be kept the set number of days from when the data was collected. If, e.g. setting the retention time for an task to 30 days, will keep data until it is 30 days old where it will be automatically removed. See image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to set a default retention time for resource groups. To do this, add a global value label named &#039;&#039;&#039;RETENTION_TIME&#039;&#039;&#039; to the resource group and give it an appropriate value. This value will then be used as a template value when creating a new task for this resource group. If multiple resource groups have this label and they have different values, the one with the lowest/shortest retention time value will be chosen as the template value.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&amp;diff=3799</id>
		<title>Creating a Task</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&amp;diff=3799"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T13:15:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* DLT UDS Mode */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;== Creating a Task==&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You create a new task by pressing the &amp;quot;New Task&amp;quot; button on the bottom of the &amp;quot;Tasks&amp;quot; tab. This will open a window where you choose the type of task you want to create. Note that it is not possible to create a new task for a WCU which has the system labels &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;shelving_in_progress&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;shelving_done&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;. However, if the WCU has the latter label, it is possible to unshelve it using the corresponding button in the bottom of the Vehicle-tab.  Here we will go through how to create tasks of each of the different kinds of tasks available. Remember that not all of the task types will be available as this depends on customer configuration and some types might not be enabled in the portal. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn about how to add resources to the task, check [[New task|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Arcos ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arcos-task.png|alt=The dialog for creating an Arcos task.|thumb|The dialog for creating an Arcos task.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. From version 2.71 the portal can interact with the Arcos-logger from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The file should have the extension &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.ccmc&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. When the task is downloaded the WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the Arcos - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since version 2.79.0 Arcos tasks can now have software version validation in the same manner as described for the M-Log task (see [[Creating a Task#Software version validation (Available from version 2.74.0)|Software version validation]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Area5 ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Area5 new task.png|thumb|500x500px|Area5 task]]&lt;br /&gt;
Area5 tasks are used to read out data from the memory of ECUs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment:&#039;&#039;&#039; To create a new Area5 task you first have to create an Area5 assignment in the [[Area5 Assignment Editor|Area5 Assignment Editor]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Validate ECU SW version on WCU:&#039;&#039;&#039; By checking this box, the WCU will validate that the ECU SW version of the task and the actual ECU are the same before starting the task. If they are different, it will not start the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger Expression:&#039;&#039;&#039; The task can be started by an expression. This option lets the user specify start trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). For an explanation of trigger conditions look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sync Signal:&#039;&#039;&#039; It is possible to specify a signal with given values that will be sent when the Area5 task starts and stops. This can be used to synchronize the Area5 read-out with external measurements systems like the M-Log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Audio ==&lt;br /&gt;
An audio task makes it possible to record audio from a connected microphone. An audio recording can be started in five ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger button&#039;&#039;&#039;: to initiate the recording you need to attach a button to the WCU in order to start in the audio recording.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Signal reader&#039;&#039;&#039;: initiate the recording by a trigger expression in a Signal Reader assignment. The recording is started as soon as a Signal Reader &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; is started. You specify the name of the Signal Reader recorder (e.g. SREC_0) you want to start the audio recording. You can also enter &amp;quot;auto&amp;quot; as the recorder name, in which case a recorder that include the Audio_Device_n internal signal will be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039;: Similar to the &#039;Signal reader&#039; trigger option, the &#039;Expression&#039; option lets the user specify start and stop trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). Unlike the &#039;Signal Reader&#039; trigger, there does not have to be a recorder configured in the Signal Reader measurement assignment. For an explanation of triggers look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Audio level&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the trigger once the microphone registers volume above a certain threshold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;: start the recording as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to this, you can set the &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-trig&#039;&#039;&#039; time which is only valid in the cases of trigger button, signal reader, expression and audio level above. As an example, let&#039;s assume the trigger button method is selected. At the moment the trigger button is pressed the audio has already been recorded for the number of seconds specified. This can be handy when you press the trigger button to make a comment about an event where the event was audible.[[File:Skärmavbild 2019-12-18 kl. 14.28.52.png|alt=Audio task|thumb|Audio task]]A maximum &#039;&#039;&#039;duration&#039;&#039;&#039; of the recording can also be set, in seconds from the start trigger event. If there is a stop trigger expression specified, the recording will be stopped either when the stop expression is fulfilled or the max duration is passed, whichever occurs first. If you do not enter a duration it will be set to a default value of 120 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to monitor the audio live. To do this, check the box &amp;quot;Monitoring&amp;quot;. To listen to the live audio you should use a tool such as [http://confero.alkit.se Alkit Confero]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is more information about audio in WICE [[Wice audio|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio tasks can be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Blue piraT ==&lt;br /&gt;
The blue PiraT is a measurement system from Telemotive AG that can be configured with measurement set-ups, and data accessed through the WICE Portal. Note that to use the blue PiraT module, the WCUs to be used need to be preconfigured with a special software package (i.e. an &amp;quot;extra bundle&amp;quot;). Contact Alkit Communications in order to set this up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CAN-recorder ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canrecorder.png|thumb|Canrecorder]]&lt;br /&gt;
Canrecorder is a measurement module that allows CAN frames to be captured and logged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the grid, select which bus (or buses) to record from. By clicking below active column or select a row and click on “Toggle” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To apply filters on specific CAN buses, select a row and click on “Edit filter”. There it is possible to select one specific frame or several by separating them by “,”. It is also possible to select a range between frames by using “-”. The value can either be decimal or hexadecimal. A example of a filter: “1, 0x12-0xFF”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Below the grid settings for how long the recording should be and how many shots. If not using shot count, infinite result files will be created as long as the units are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Scheduling=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with version &amp;gt;= 2.53 this task can be scheduled by selecting the &amp;quot;Add schedule&amp;quot;-checkbox. By doing so, the panel shown in Figure &amp;quot;Schedule Panel&amp;quot; appears. By thereafter selecting the &amp;quot;ASAP&amp;quot; checkbox, the task will be performed once and as soon as possible. If instead the task is to be performed at a specified time, deselect the &amp;quot;Time span&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot;-checkboxes and select the sought time in the &amp;quot;Start field&amp;quot;. The task can also be performed within a certain time span, and in this case &amp;quot;Time span&amp;quot; should be checked and the Date in &amp;quot;End&amp;quot; field specified. Repetition of the task is defined by checking the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; checkbox, defining a interval size in the field after &amp;quot;Every&amp;quot; and a recurrence rate in the drop down menu. The task will then be repeated at this rate until the date defined in the &amp;quot;Until&amp;quot; field is reached. By selecting the &amp;quot;On ignition&amp;quot; checkbox, the task will be performed once on ignition. If delay is above 0 then the task will be performed once the configured amount of seconds have passed after ignition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration Schedule.png|thumb|left|600px|Schedule Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scheduling on ignition.png|thumb|300x300px|Schedule Panel with &#039;On ignition&#039; enabled]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To control the time zone in which the task scheduling is to be performed the &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot;-checkbox is used. If this option is deselected, the task will be performed in UTC-time (the date fields present the portal local time). On the other hand, if this box is checked, the task will be performed according to the local time zone predefined for the WCU. A WCU time zone can be defined for a WCU with version &amp;gt;= 2.53 by an administrator using &amp;quot;Edit configuration&amp;quot; in the [[The Portal Administrator View#The Vehicles Tab|Vehicles panel]]. This is useful when there is a need to perform a certain task at a specific time of the day regardless of which country the vehicle is in. For instance, when selecting 100 different WCUs scheduled to perform a task at 10:00, checking the &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot;-checkbox will result in them performing the task according to their time zone setting. Without checking this option, the task will be performed in the corresponding UTC-time, which could mean in the middle of the day or night depending on where the vehicle is located.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) ==&lt;br /&gt;
The DLT functionality comes in two flavors. One is based on communicating with a DLT daemon on the ECU and the other is based on the UDS service 38. From version 2.92.0 the latter is also supported. You switch between the using the button &amp;quot;DLT UDS mode&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DLT Daemon Mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
DLT itself provides a log and trace interface, based on the standardized protocol specified in the AUTOSAR standard 4.0 DLT. A DLT task in the WICE Portal makes it possible to collect such logs in a vehicle where this functionality is available and transfer the data to the WICE portal where logs can be downloaded for further analysis. For a more in-depth description, you can go [https://github.com/GENIVI/dlt-daemon here]. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dlt-daemon.png|thumb|The DLT new task dialog for the daemon mode.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Basically the WCU is connecting to one or more DLT Daemons and unique filters can be applied to each daemon, filtering out specific log messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So when creating a DLT task on WCUs with software version 2.72.0 or later the number of daemons can be specified and for each daemon the following needs to be specified:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Daemon address - the IP-address in order for the WCUs DLT client to find the daemon.&lt;br /&gt;
# Daemon port - which port on the address the daemon is at.&lt;br /&gt;
# Filter configurations - filter expressions to be applied on the log messages. If left empty no filter is applied. For an explanation on how to write filter expressions, see [https://github.com/GENIVI/dlt-daemon#learn-more here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Older WCUs ====&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version earlier than 2.72.0 only one daemon is supported and only filters can be configured when creating a DLT task. To specify the daemon address and port go to the [[DLT Module]] instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DLT UDS Mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
When in this mode the user is presented with a list of directories to handle. Each row in the table is for a specific WCU and directory, as indicated in the illustration for the UDS mode to the right. To add a row, or directory to fetch, press the button &amp;quot;Add transfer&amp;quot;. An editable row shows up in the table where you can enter data. Enter the ECU ID as hexadecimal number, an optional pin code (more on this later) and the directory to fetch. You can add as many entries as you wish.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dlt-uds-task.png|thumb|DLT UDS service 38 task]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is a check box with the text &amp;quot;Use vehicle specific PINs&amp;quot;. By checking the box, the system will try to get a vehicle specific PIN code for each ECU and WCU. How to supply the system with suck PIN codes can be done over [[Vehicles#Upload Vehicle pins|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ETAS ==&lt;br /&gt;
Through an ETAS task, an ETAS ES720 Drive Recorder system can be configured, and measurement data offloaded and accessed through the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an ETAS task, the task description file you select must be a .exp file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ethernet capture ==&lt;br /&gt;
This kind of task is used to capture packet data from one of the ethernet interfaces on the WCU. The basics for this kind of task is that you choose the interface you would like to capture from and a capture expression to filter which packets you are interested in. The results from this task type is pcap files. To read more about this task type, go [[Ethernet capture|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File fetcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:File fetcher proxy example.png|thumb|The new task dialog of the File fetcher task.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The File fetcher task fetches files from a specified unit and makes them available for downloading in the Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following needs to be specified when creating such a task:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;File path&#039;&#039;&#039; - One or several paths to a files or file-containing directories on the unit&#039;s file system. This specifies which files that will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;IP address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Port&#039;&#039;&#039; -  To find the unit. Default is 22, but can be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the task also allows the use of a proxy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use a proxy, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Use Proxy&#039;&#039;&#039; checkbox has to be checked, and the following must be specified:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the proxy unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the proxy unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy IP Address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the proxy unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy Port&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the proxy unit. Default is 22, but can be changed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== IDC ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC) is a measurement module that allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent and responses recorded. The sequence of diagnostic requests can be created as an assignment in the Assignment tab, alternatively can be uploaded to the portal as a text file (usually ending with &amp;quot;.seq&amp;quot;). This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IPEmotion RT ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. From version 2.72 the portal can interact with the logger IPEmotion RT from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The file should have the extension &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.irf&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. When the task is downloaded the WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the IPEmotion RT - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since version 2.79.0 IPEmotion RT tasks can now have software version validation in the same manner as described for the M-Log task (see [[Creating a Task#Software version validation (Available from version 2.74.0)|Software version validation]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LPD ==&lt;br /&gt;
This type of task is ultimately handled by a separate App in an iPhone or iPad. The WICE system simply makes this task available to the App through a REST interface running on the WCU. The task consists of a specially crafted excel file. When the file is uploaded to the WICE portal it is validated to make sure that it can be read by the App.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2023-05-24 16-09-55.png|thumb|View an LPD task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot-edit-lpd.png|thumb|Upload opportunity after pressing the Edit button]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.83.0 of the WICE portal the task measurement file can be updated via the View Task function in the Tasks tab and a dialog as shown to the right will appear. By pressing the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button in the lower right corner, you will be presented with the possibility to upload a new measurement task file. This is shown with a red triangle in the illustration on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M-Log ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. One such logger is called M-Log from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.[[File:MlogForWiki.png|thumb|M-Log task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-21 09-34-11.png|alt=Entering ECU software version|thumb|Entering ECU software version]]&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the MLOG - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Software version validation (Available from version 2.74.0) ====&lt;br /&gt;
The measurement assignment for an MLOG is created using an external tool to WICE. An assignment is created with a certain version of the ECU software in mind for each ECU in the assignment. In order for the assignment to work it might be important that the ECU software version in the vehicle matches the software version of the ECU it was created for. In WICE, you can ask the system to read the current software version for each ECU which is stored and can be viewed, e.g. via the [[ECU List|ECU list]]. As WICE cannot know which software versions the assignment was created for, the user can supply this to WICE. By doing that, WICE can validate the entered software versions against what has been read out for each vehicle and thus aid the user in making sure that an assignment will work once it will run. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make the validation possible the user enters a ECU by its address, not the name. To help find out the address for an ECU you can go to the [[ECU List|ECU list]] to find the address of a specific ECU. Have a look at the illustration, Entering ECU software version, to see where in the dialog this is entered. On the top you enter the ECU address on the left and what software version is expected on the right. When satisfied, press the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button. The data you just entered will be added to the table and evaluated against what the WICE system has read out from the vehicle. In the example to the right something is incorrect which is indicated by the yellow color. To see the exact reason, simply use the cursor to see the specific message. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A negative validation in not enforced in the sense that you cannot run the assignment but rather an indication that it might not work as expected. You can always go ahead and press &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== MQTT ==&lt;br /&gt;
A MQTT task makes it possible to record data from a MQTT message broker, by specifying a specific topic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rapid prototyping ==&lt;br /&gt;
A Rapid prototyping (RP) task makes it possible to download RP binaries to multiple WCUs and keep track of the result files the RP task might produce. For more information about RP, see [[WICE RP How-To]] and [[WICE RP Manual]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rapid prototyping task.png|thumb|Rapid prototyping task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The rapid prototyping tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Rapid prototyping task&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An RP task must consist of at least an &#039;RP binary&#039; or a &#039;Web application zip file&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SoftHub ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SoftHub is a measurement system that can be run either as a stand alone unit or as a software module on the WCU, with functionality similar to the Signal Reader module. A SoftHub task is created much in the same way as a Signal Reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a SoftHub task, you select a .shub task file, and then proceed in the same way as the Signal Reader task. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SoftHub task will generate result files. It may be interesting to know if certain signals reach certain values in these result files, therefore it is possible to add &#039;&#039;&#039;server triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; to the task that will trigger and add a suitable label to the corresponding result file. Read more about this [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader == &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration SignalReader.png|thumb|271x271px|Signal reader task]]&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader is a data capture module that allows monitoring and logging of CAN and FlexRay signals, as well as diagnostics data, and ECU-internal signals read by CCP or XCP. To create a Signal Reader task you proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. You either select an assignment file of .haf format, or choose an assignment created in the assignment creator (see [[Signal Reader Assignment Wizard]]). Your current choice will be displayed in the &amp;quot;Chosen file&amp;quot; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When you have selected an assignment and one or more WCUs, the CAN buses defined in the assignment and on the WCU will be mapped. If they can be automatically mapped a green check symbol will be displayed, otherwise a red cross will be displayed. Clicking the mapping button will open the mapper. In the pop-up window you will have to map the different buses to each other manually and then save. Once this is done correctly, the red cross will become a green check mark, indicating that the mappings are ready to be automatically applied upon submit. Read more about this in [[I/O configurations]] and [[Mappings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. With a Signal Reader task you can monitor CAN, FlexRay, ODB-II and WCU-internal signals live by selecting &amp;quot;Monitor signals&amp;quot;. When selected, two boxes will appear under the task description. In the left one you search for signals and drag them over to the right one where the signals to be monitored are listed. You can later see the monitored signals by pressing the &#039;&#039;&#039;Monitor Signals&#039;&#039;&#039; button either in the Tasks tab or in the Vehicles tab. It is also possible to copy the signals text in the bottom right corner of the right box. Next to the copy text button you can also paste signals as text where the pasted signal names will be matched against the list of unselected signals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. You can choose if you want the signals to have their data source names as a prefix (e.g. CAN1.EngineSpeed instead of EngineSpeed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. The Signal Reader task will generate result files. It may be interesting to know if certain signals reach certain values in these result files, therefore it is possible to add &#039;&#039;&#039;Server Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; to the assignment that will trigger and add a suitable label to the corresponding result file. Read more about this [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Signal reader task can be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Signal Broker === &lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader can act as a Signal Broker for other software components. For instance, the audio and video modules relies on the Signal Broker API of Signal Reader for evaluating start and stop trigger expressions. Moreover, the Signal Broker gives programmatical access to signals for Rapid Prototyping tasks.  Read more about this in [[WICE Signal Broker API]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Files containing references to sequence files === &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SequenceFileForSignalreader.png|thumb|right|Sequence Files References in .haf File]] &lt;br /&gt;
If the measurement file contains references to sequence files, you are also required to select these in order to run the task. The portal scans the .haf file for such entries and presents this to you, see illustration 4.2. Click the button for each sequence file reference to upload each sequence file needed. Some requests in the sequence file may be for reading DTCs, and in such cases you can select the option of also reading associated &#039;&#039;Snapshots&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;. An example of this can found in Figure &amp;quot;Sequence Files References in .haf File&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SequenceFilesForSignalreaderWithFunctionalQuery.png|thumb|right|Sequence File with Functional Query]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the .haf file contained two references to sequence files. As no sequence files have yet been uploaded, the selection for reading snapshot or extended data is grayed out. In Figure &amp;quot;Sequence File with Functional Query&amp;quot; we have selected one such sequence file containing (functional) DTC requests. Here we have checked that we would like to read &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;. It is also possible to select both &#039;&#039;Snapshots&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WICE internal signals ===&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to CAN and FlexRay signals, a number of internal signals (i.e. internal to the WCU) are also available. The following WICE-internal signals are supported: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SoH ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-43-34.png|thumb|799x799px|SoH]]&lt;br /&gt;
A State of Health (SoH) task collects specific status information from vehicles. You select which information you want the task to collect by filling in one or more of the checkboxes shown in Figure &amp;quot;SoH&amp;quot;. The number of checkboxes shown can vary depending on the WICE installation. In order for SoH data to be correctly interpreted, relevant description files (e.g. SDDB) for the vehicles executing the SoH task may have to been available. To add such a description file for a vehicle, see [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog|The Edit Car Dialog]].The six different options are:&lt;br /&gt;
*Mileage&lt;br /&gt;
*Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
*Read ECU software numbers&lt;br /&gt;
*Read ECU DTC:s (optionally including &#039;Snapshot&#039; and &#039;Extended data&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
*Read OBD-II PIDs&lt;br /&gt;
*App Diagnotstic Db Part Num&lt;br /&gt;
*DM1, Diagnostic Message using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Odometer, reading the odometer using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]] (available from WCU version 2.63)&lt;br /&gt;
*Clear DTCs. &lt;br /&gt;
**If reading DTCs is requested as well, those will be read before clearing the DTCs. (available from WCU version 2.63)&lt;br /&gt;
**If this option (Clear DTC) is chosen it is optionally possible to set a PIN code for unlocking a gateway module - e.g. Vehicle Gateway Module (VGM). (Available from WCU version 2.66)&lt;br /&gt;
*Engine hours, reading engine hours using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]] (available from WCU version 2.64). The result for this can be read in the generated j1939-file from the task. It is a text type of file. In addition, a system value label called &#039;engine_hours&#039; (as default, can be changed on a customer basis). This label shows the latest read value and is available on the vehicle.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some selections above might not be available to you as this is a configuration setting depending on customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SWDL ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Swdl task Screenshot from 2023-06-28 14-50-55.png|thumb|791x791px|New SWDL task]]&lt;br /&gt;
A Software Download (SWDL) task updates the ECU software in one or more ECUs in one or more vehicles. A number of Versatile Binary Format (VBF) files containing the ECU software need to be supplied, along with PIN codes to allow security access to re-program the ECUs. The PIN codes should be in the format of five hexadecimal numbers, e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ff:00:1a:2c:77&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or alternatively, omitting the colon separator, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ff001a2c77&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;). When a SWDL task has been created and assigned to one or more WCUs, it will cause all vbf files to be downloaded to the WCUs, and then the actual re-programming can be triggered by the vehicle user through the WCU status GUI web interface. The uploaded vbf-files are presented in a table along with its ECU and software part type (SW part type). In a separate table, the PIN codes for each ECU are presented along with the total number of files uploaded per WCU, see Figure &amp;quot;New SWDL task&amp;quot;. To get an overview of how the files relate to the ECUs it is possible to choose the &amp;quot;Group by&amp;quot;-option when right clicking the ECU column in the file table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include a &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-update sequence file and/or a post-update sequence file&#039;&#039;&#039;. The diagnostic requests of those sequence files will be sent before and after the ECU re-programming respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include one &#039;&#039;&#039;signature file&#039;&#039;&#039; (containing checksums). The file is assumed to be an xml file. (Available from WCU version 2.66) If either of the optional files is selected, a field will appear to the right of the chosen file. This field will contain the name of the chosen file. (Available from WCU version 2.70)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include a &#039;&#039;&#039;VGM unlock&#039;&#039;&#039; access control mechanism, with a PIN code for the VGM node. This is specifically for vehicles requiring this kind of access control for ECU re-programming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By checking the box &#039;&#039;&#039;Run SoH after completion&#039;&#039;&#039; it is possible to let the SWDL task run the WCUs SoH task after the SWDL task is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like to use any individual ECU pin codes for a vehicle, make sure to check the box &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Vehicle Pin mappings&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. If a pin code for the ECU targeted by a vbf file, the pin code for the vehicle will be used. If no such pin code is found, the one entered in the right hand side table is used. Read more on how to prepare a vehicle with pin codes [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger Expression&#039;&#039;&#039; which must be fulfilled within a specified time limit (&amp;quot;Wait time&amp;quot;) for ECU re-programming to be allowed. The trigger expression follows the same syntax as Signal Reader trigger expressions (or [[Server Trigger|Server Triggers]], audio/video triggers), and should be built up from signals being measured in a Signal Reader assignment. The user must make sure that there is a Signal Reader assignment on the WCUs of the SWDL task, with the signals of the trigger expression being measured.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to choose to &#039;&#039;&#039;ignore checksums&#039;&#039;&#039; and/or &#039;&#039;&#039;disable pre-programming&#039;&#039;&#039; using the corresponding checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SWDL module can be [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Software Download Module|configured]] to perform SWDL either over CAN or over Ethernet (DoIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
A video task makes it possible to record and monitor live video from one or two cameras attached to a WCU. You can trigger recording of video in four ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger button&#039;&#039;&#039;: To initiate the recording you need to attach a button to the WCU in order to start in the video recording.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Signal reader&#039;&#039;&#039;: Initiate the recording when a recorder in a Signal Reader assignment starts. The recording is started as soon as a Signal Reader &#039;&#039;recorder&#039;&#039; is started. You specify the name of the Signal Reader recorder (e.g. SREC_0) you want to start the video recording. You can also enter &amp;quot;auto&amp;quot; as the recorder name, in which case a recorder that include the Video_Device_n internal signal will be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039;: Similar to the &#039;Signal reader&#039; trigger option, the &#039;Expression&#039; option lets the user specify start and stop trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). Unlike the &#039;Signal Reader&#039; trigger, there does not have to be a recorder configured in the Signal Reader measurement assignment. For an explanation of how to enter triggers, have a look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;: start the recording as soon as possible. (Use this with caution, since it tends to produce prohibitively large video files.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to this, you can set the &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-trig&#039;&#039;&#039; time (not valid in the cases of the &#039;None&#039; trigger option above). As an example, let&#039;s assume the trigger button method is selected. At the moment the trigger button is pressed the video has already been recorded for the number of seconds specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A maximum &#039;&#039;&#039;duration&#039;&#039;&#039; of the recording can also be set, in seconds from the start trigger event. If there is a stop trigger expression specified, the recording will be stopped either when the stop expression is fulfilled or the max duration is passed, whichever occurs first. If you do not enter a duration it will be set to a default value of 120 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If monitoring of video from a WCU is enabled, a live video stream will be transmitted which can be viewed using a RTP-based video tool, for instance [http://confero.alkit.se Alkit Confero]. This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about the video support in WICE [[WICE_video|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applicable for all types ==&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled at your site, there might be an opportunity to announce to third party applications that a result file is available using a [[wikipedia:Jakarta_Messaging|JMS API]]. By checking this box, as soon as a result file is added in the back-end this will be signaled using a customer specific event. The check box title is &amp;quot;Announce result file availability&amp;quot;, this can be seen in the image in [[#SoH|SoH]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Site specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Announce result file availability ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resultfilepanel.png|thumb|Announced On column]]&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled at your site, there might be an opportunity to announce to third party applications that a result file is available using a [[wikipedia:Jakarta_Messaging|JMS API]]. By checking this box, as soon as a result file is added in the back-end this will be signaled using a customer specific event. The check box title is &amp;quot;Announce result file availability&amp;quot;, this can be seen in the image in [[#SoH|SoH]]. Starting from version 2.87.0, there&#039;s a new &#039;Announced On&#039; column that keeps track of when the result file was announced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Retention time ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Retention time.png|thumb|435x435px|Retention time]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works by setting a retention time in days which simply says that data coming in from the task, i.e. result files and positions will be kept the set number of days from when the data was collected. If, e.g. setting the retention time for an task to 30 days, will keep data until it is 30 days old where it will be automatically removed. See image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to set a default retention time for resource groups. To do this, add a global value label named &#039;&#039;&#039;RETENTION_TIME&#039;&#039;&#039; to the resource group and give it an appropriate value. This value will then be used as a template value when creating a new task for this resource group. If multiple resource groups have this label and they have different values, the one with the lowest/shortest retention time value will be chosen as the template value.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Vehicles&amp;diff=3795</id>
		<title>Vehicles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Vehicles&amp;diff=3795"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T12:26:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Resource Groups */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;=Vehicles Tab=&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This view is used to handle the various vehicles that are assigned to you. A figure of this view&lt;br /&gt;
is presented below in the Figure &amp;quot;Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;. At the top, the red section, is a search area where you&lt;br /&gt;
type in the criteria to be used for fetching the vehicles you are interested in. As you enter your&lt;br /&gt;
criteria a row count is presented in the upper right area to show how many potential matches&lt;br /&gt;
there are. The entries are also fetched as you type but only as many rows as fit your current&lt;br /&gt;
view are fetched. As you scroll down more results will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration26.png|none|thumb|700x700px|Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of possible columns to show is quite large. You can select which columns you wish to see by right clicking on the column header and select &amp;quot;Columns..&amp;quot;. A small window will pop-up, in which you can select which columns should be visible in the table. These are the available columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Active alarms&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Presents a numeric summary of alarms. It displays the amount of errors and warnings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Connected&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Connected&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows how many minutes have passed since the WCU made a connection to the WICE portal.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Distance&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Distance&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the distance the car has been driven the last week. (SoH task specific)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Last_DRO&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Last DRO&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Says when the DRO log file was last transferred to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Last_log&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Last log&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows when the last log file was transferred to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Mileage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Mileage&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The column shows the mileage of the car.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Plate_number&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Plate number&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The plate number of the car where the WCU is mounted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Platform type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Search WCU by platform type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Project_Id&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Project Id&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the project identification number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Proto_number&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Proto number&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the proto number.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Resource group&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|The resource group (if any) the WCU is part of.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Series&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Series&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the series attribute.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;TSU&amp;quot;&amp;gt;TSU&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the TSU identifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Upload&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| This column says how much data has been transferred from the WCU to the portal the last week.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Upload_date&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Upload date&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Contains which date the last upload was done&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Upload_size&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Upload size&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Says what the size, in kilobytes, of the last data upload was.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Up-time&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Uptime&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows how many hours the WCU been running the last week.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;VIN&amp;quot;&amp;gt;VIN&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the Vehicle Identification Number of the car where the WCU is mounted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Voltage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Voltage &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The column shows the latest known battery voltage as reported by the CEM.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_ID&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU ID&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| The MAC ID of the WCU. For example: AA-01-AA-01-AA-01.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_Description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU Description&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| A textual comment attached to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Firmware&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Shows which firmware the WCU uses.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_voltage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU voltage&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the voltage as measured by the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_Version&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU Version&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows which version the current WCU software has.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;WCU_storage_usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;WCU storage usage&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| Shows the amount of storage available to store data on the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;WCU name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Shows the name of the WCU&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, as there are so many columns present you have the option of selecting which ones you would like to see by right-clicking on the table header. If you would like your selection to be remembered between sessions, use the binocular icon with an add sign in bottom right corner in the Figure &amp;quot;Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;. To save the currently entered search expression, similarly use the magnifying glass icon with an add sign. To read more about the view and search functionality, click [[Save View and Search Expressions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a concept called “resource groups” you should be aware of in this panel. A resource group is simply a way to refer to a group of resources (WCU, Car) collectively. An example is when creating tasks you can select a resource group instead of the individual WCU:s to start a new task. Also, when showing the positions on a map, you select a resource group and press “Show position”, all WCU:s in that resource group will show. To see which resources are in a resource group you press the triangle to the left of the row and the row&lt;br /&gt;
opens up to show the individual members. To show the members in the view you can rightclick the entry and select the option “find members” from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting a row in the table the selected row changes to a blue shade. You can modify&lt;br /&gt;
the description of the WCU by clicking in the “Edit Description” button and entering a new description. You can search among the vehicles log files by clicking the “Get log files” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Right click context menu ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you select one or more rows in the table, you can right click on the selected rows. This will display a context menu with several options, some of which are described here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to Tasks Panel &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to instantly jump to the tasks panel, which will automatically perform a search based on either the WCU or the car which the selected row represents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to Search Panel &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to instantly jump to the search panel. The search panel will automatically perform a search based on either the WCU or the car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to Timeline &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to jump to the Timeline-view, which will adjust itself to the WCU you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to alarms &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting this will take you to the alarms panel, where a search is conducted for all selected WCUs. This allows you to quickly see all alarms for a specific set of WCU resources. This works well together with the Active Alarms column (which you can read about further up this page), which tells you if a WCU has any active alarms. If a WCU has any active alarms, then using &amp;quot;go to alarms&amp;quot; will allow you to review those alarms in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039; Remove WCU(s) from Resource Group &#039;&#039;&#039;  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If WCUs which are included in a resource group are selected, the menu option &amp;quot;Remove WCU(s) from Resource Group&amp;quot; will appear. They do not have to be in the same resource group as each other. If a resource which do not fulfill this requirement is selected in addition, this option will not be visible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show WCU history&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HistoryWCUPanel.png|alt=|thumb|Example of a Show WCU history]]&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting this shows a window with the history of the selected WCU. The following columns will be displayed in the window:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Change date - Displays the date the WCU was changed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Description - Displays a description of the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
* Active - Shows if the WCU is active or not.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCU ID  - Shows the WCU ID.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCU name - Displays the WCU name.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCU version - The WCU version.&lt;br /&gt;
* WCU firmware version - The WCU firmware version.&lt;br /&gt;
* Changed by - The user who modified the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
* Resource group - The resource group.&lt;br /&gt;
* ICCID - The SIM card installed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem ID - Shows the Modem ID. (This is hidden by default but can be revealed by right-clicking a column and selecting the &amp;quot;Columns&amp;quot; drop down menu.). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Show WCU history option to be available only a single WCU can be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger upload now&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Momentarily stop the WCU, offload it and upload any data as soon as possible. This trigger button is only visible if the WCU state is in-operation and the WCU version is later then 2.39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger reboot now&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reboots the trigger and WCU. This trigger button is only visible if the WCU state is in-operation and the WCU version is later then 2.39&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger collect and upload&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This action will cause the task to momentarily stop and upload any data as soon as possible. This trigger button is only visible if the WCU state is in-operation and the WCU version is later then 2.45.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger VIN readout&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger VIN readout, this action will cause the task to momentarily stop .This trigger button is only visible if the WCU state is in-operation and the WCU version is later then 2.65.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==New task==&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new task for all selected WCUs, click the button [[New task|New Task]]. To learn more about creating each specific task see [[Creating a Task]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show the Vehicle Position==&lt;br /&gt;
To see the last reported position of a vehicle, click the “Show Position” button which opens up a map view of where the vehicle was last known to be. You can view several vehicles simultaneously by ctrl- or shift-clicking the vehicles you are interested in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to know more about the &amp;quot;Show position&amp;quot;-tool [[Show position|you can read more about it here]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==View Diagnostic Trouble Codes==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration28.png|thumb|300px|Viewing Diagnostic Trouble Codes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SoH task has been enabled to do Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) read-outs, you can view the trouble codes by selecting the vehicle you are interested in and push the button “View DTCs”. In Figure &amp;quot;Viewing Diagnostic Trouble Codes&amp;quot; you can see an example presentation of DTCs. There are five columns in the table. The leftmost is the name of the ECU issuing the DTC, next is the date and time when the trouble code was read-out, the actual DTC with clear text description, and thereafter the VIN and WCU id of the vehicle. &lt;br /&gt;
If you click in the column for the actual trouble code, a dialog opens with that particular trouble codes. You can extend the size of the dialog in order to examine the trouble codes in more detail.&lt;br /&gt;
You can also search the trouble codes as you can see at the top of Figure &amp;quot;Viewing Diagnostic Trouble Codes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==View ECU software==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration29.png|thumb|300px|ECU Software Versions]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to see the ECU software number for each ECU in a vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
Press the button “ECU SW” after you have selected one vehicle. The following view will be&lt;br /&gt;
shown. As you can see in Figure &amp;quot;ECU Software Versions&amp;quot;, each ECU&#039;s software number is shown along with&lt;br /&gt;
when it was read. You can download the list as a tab-separated text file if you press “Download”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Get WCU Up-time==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wcu_uptime.png|frame|WCU Up-time Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function is used to get a compilation of the up-time of a set of vehicles during a particular time span. Select the WCUs you are interested in and the click the “Get WCU uptime” button. This brings up the dialog to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the dates you are interested by choosing a start and end date. Next you have the option of downloading a CSV file, or excel file. The up-time in that file is listed as hours up-time per day per WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to compile the up-time in a chart shown on screen. The up-time is averaged over the WCUs selected for each day. WCUs having no up-time at all are excluded from the compilation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 there is a new feature to display the WCUs uptime based on the data sent from statusd. More info in [[WCU Uptime]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export SoH Data==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Soh data export.png|frame|SoH Data Export Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can export data from SoH tasks to your local computer by using the function&lt;br /&gt;
“Export SoH data”. Select the cars you are interested in as you can export for more than&lt;br /&gt;
one car in one export.&lt;br /&gt;
You select the dates you are interested in getting the data from. Check each item you are interested in. Currently you can select mileage, WCU voltage, ECU software versions, battery voltage, storage usage and diagnostic trouble codes. &lt;br /&gt;
The file can be exported in CSV format (suitable for Excel and other spreadsheet applications) and in XML format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Resource Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
WCUs and cars can collectively be referred to as &amp;quot;resources&amp;quot;. As such they can be grouped&lt;br /&gt;
together and be handled collectively in order to ease the administration of a set of similar individuals. A resource group can consist of both cars and WCUs but usually only&lt;br /&gt;
one type of resource is in a resource group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You identify a resource group by a gray arrow like icon to the left in the table row. If you&lt;br /&gt;
click the icon the entry opens up and makes room for showing which resources are part&lt;br /&gt;
of the resource group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 viewing the resource group&#039;s resources has been improved. More info can be found in [[Resource group&#039;s resources]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a new task is created any resource groups assigned to you will show up in addition to individual WCUs. There is, however, no indication as to the particular entry is a&lt;br /&gt;
resource group or not. If you select a resource group, the new task will be downloaded to all the WCUs that are part of the resource group.&lt;br /&gt;
As a regular user you can not create and remove resource groups, only an administrator&lt;br /&gt;
of the portal can do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.42 of the portal it is easier to search out members of resource groups using the &amp;quot;Resource group&amp;quot; column. When searching in this column one will get results that either matches the name of a resource group WCU or WCUs that are part of a resource group that matches the search criteria. In other words, if we search for &amp;quot;ABCD&amp;quot; we will get the resource group &amp;quot;ABCD&amp;quot; together with all WCUs that are part of the &amp;quot;ABCD&amp;quot; group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This column can also be used to list all WCUs that are not part of any resource group. To perform this search, put &amp;quot;^$&amp;quot; in the &amp;quot;Resource group&amp;quot; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can find the resource group that a WCU belongs to, by right-clicking the WCU and select &amp;quot;Search resource group&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modules==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the right permission you will be able to view a WCU:s modules, and&lt;br /&gt;
configure them. A module is a specific functionality of the WCU, such as a measurement tool. The available modules are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#configure the area5 module|Area5]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the audio module|Audio]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Blue piraT Module|Blue piraT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Canrecorder Module|Canrecorder]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[DLT Module|DLT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the DoIP Module|DoIP]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the ETAS Module|ETAS]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the File fetcher module|File Fetcher]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the GPS Module|GPS]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the IDC Module|IDC]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the IPEmotion RT Module|IPEmotion RT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the LPD Module|LPD]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the MCD-Hub Module|MCD-Hub]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the M-log Module|M-log]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the MQTT Module|MQTT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the RP Module|Rapid Prototyping (RP)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Signal Reader Module|Signal Reader]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the SmartEye Module|Smart Eye]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Soft-Hub|SoftHub]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Software Download Module|Software Download (SWDL)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the State of Health Module|State of Health (SoH)]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Uptime Module|Uptime]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Vinreader Module|Vinreader]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Video Module|Video]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Resource_group%27s_resources&amp;diff=3794</id>
		<title>Resource group&#039;s resources</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Resource_group%27s_resources&amp;diff=3794"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T12:26:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;== Resource group&#039;s resources ==&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Information Panel!.png|thumb|Information Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.78.0 viewing a resource group&#039;s resources has been moved to the information panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clicking on the first black symbol (from the left) down in the right corner in the Vehicles tab, the information panel grid pops up. This can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Information Panel&amp;quot;. The information panel consists of 7 tabs. One of them are called resource group. It&#039;s important that the selected row in the vehicles panel is a resource group or else the information will not be shown. To find more information about what the Resource group contains click [[Information Panel|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3793</id>
		<title>New features in v2.92</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3793"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T12:25:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for UDS service 38 for task type DLT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for WiFi on platform HMX/V2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
In version 2.92, we have added support for WiFi on the HMX/V2 platform in the WCU configuration panel. To access the WiFi settings, the WCU must be running at least version 2.92.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for ICCID in the WCU history panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
ICCID is now available in the WCU history panel, enabling users to see which SIM card is installed in the WCU. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice292/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Limited Remote Logon ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to specify a time limit (in hours) for the remote logon configuration. If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice292/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#Remote_Login here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch uploaded Vehicle PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to fetch PINs for HIA, HIB and Diagnostic firewall disable in the IO-tab of the WCU configuration panel. This is done by setting the checkbox &#039;Fetch Uploaded PINs&#039; which will fetch and apply any available PINs once you save the configuration. For individual WCUs it is also possible to use the &#039;Get PINs&#039; button to immediately apply the PINs and receive some additional feedback. Resource groups can only fetch PINs via the checkbox. The PINs will be automatically applied to the corresponding fields if available. Read more about fetching PINs [[I/O configurations#The Miscellaneous Section|here]] and [[I/O configurations#Get PINs or Check PINs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only PINs that have been uploaded via &#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039; in the vehicles-tab with the correct service area will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requires WCU version 2.89.0 or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal reader assignments support DREC with IDC assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
In signal reader DREC it was previously only possible to upload sequence files. Now you also can select an existing IDC assignment. Read more about DREC [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor#Recorder - DREC|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment editor now with permissions for edit and remove assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for UDS service 38 for task type DLT ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to get ECU logs using service 38 in addition to using the DLT daemon for DLT tasks. Read more about it [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to copy resource group ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to copy a resource group.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3768</id>
		<title>New features in v2.92</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3768"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T09:49:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for UDS service 38 for task type DLT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for WiFi on platform HMX/V2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
In version 2.92, we have added support for WiFi on the HMX/V2 platform in the WCU configuration panel. To access the WiFi settings, the WCU must be running at least version 2.92.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for ICCID in the WCU history panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
ICCID is now available in the WCU history panel, enabling users to see which SIM card is installed in the WCU. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice292/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Limited Remote Logon ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to specify a time limit (in hours) for the remote logon configuration. If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch uploaded Vehicle PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to fetch PINs for HIA, HIB and Diagnostic firewall disable in the IO-tab of the WCU configuration panel. This is done by setting the checkbox &#039;Fetch Uploaded PINs&#039; which will fetch and apply any available PINs once you save the configuration. For individual WCUs it is also possible to use the &#039;Get PINs&#039; button to immediately apply the PINs and receive some additional feedback. Resource groups can only fetch PINs via the checkbox. The PINs will be automatically applied to the corresponding fields if available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only PINs that have been uploaded via &#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039; in the vehicles-tab with the correct service area will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requires WCU version 2.89.0 or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal reader assignments support DREC with IDC assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment editor now with permissions for edit and remove assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for UDS service 38 for task type DLT ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to get ECU logs using service 38 in addition to using the DLT daemon for DLT tasks. Read more about it [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3767</id>
		<title>New features in v2.92</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3767"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T09:48:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for UDS service 38 for task type DLT */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for WiFi on platform HMX/V2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
In version 2.92, we have added support for WiFi on the HMX/V2 platform in the WCU configuration panel. To access the WiFi settings, the WCU must be running at least version 2.92.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for ICCID in the WCU history panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
ICCID is now available in the WCU history panel, enabling users to see which SIM card is installed in the WCU. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice292/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Limited Remote Logon ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to specify a time limit (in hours) for the remote logon configuration. If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch uploaded Vehicle PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to fetch PINs for HIA, HIB and Diagnostic firewall disable in the IO-tab of the WCU configuration panel. This is done by setting the checkbox &#039;Fetch Uploaded PINs&#039; which will fetch and apply any available PINs once you save the configuration. For individual WCUs it is also possible to use the &#039;Get PINs&#039; button to immediately apply the PINs and receive some additional feedback. Resource groups can only fetch PINs via the checkbox. The PINs will be automatically applied to the corresponding fields if available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only PINs that have been uploaded via &#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039; in the vehicles-tab with the correct service area will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requires WCU version 2.89.0 or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal reader assignments support DREC with IDC assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment editor now with permissions for edit and remove assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for UDS service 38 for task type DLT ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to get ECU logs using service 38 in addition to using the DLT daemon for DLT tasks. Read more about it [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic%20Log%20and%20Trace%20%2528DLT%2529|here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&amp;diff=3766</id>
		<title>Creating a Task</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&amp;diff=3766"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T09:43:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;== Creating a Task==&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You create a new task by pressing the &amp;quot;New Task&amp;quot; button on the bottom of the &amp;quot;Tasks&amp;quot; tab. This will open a window where you choose the type of task you want to create. Note that it is not possible to create a new task for a WCU which has the system labels &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;shelving_in_progress&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;shelving_done&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;. However, if the WCU has the latter label, it is possible to unshelve it using the corresponding button in the bottom of the Vehicle-tab.  Here we will go through how to create tasks of each of the different kinds of tasks available. Remember that not all of the task types will be available as this depends on customer configuration and some types might not be enabled in the portal. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn about how to add resources to the task, check [[New task|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Arcos ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arcos-task.png|alt=The dialog for creating an Arcos task.|thumb|The dialog for creating an Arcos task.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. From version 2.71 the portal can interact with the Arcos-logger from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The file should have the extension &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.ccmc&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. When the task is downloaded the WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the Arcos - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since version 2.79.0 Arcos tasks can now have software version validation in the same manner as described for the M-Log task (see [[Creating a Task#Software version validation (Available from version 2.74.0)|Software version validation]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Area5 ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Area5 new task.png|thumb|500x500px|Area5 task]]&lt;br /&gt;
Area5 tasks are used to read out data from the memory of ECUs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment:&#039;&#039;&#039; To create a new Area5 task you first have to create an Area5 assignment in the [[Area5 Assignment Editor|Area5 Assignment Editor]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Validate ECU SW version on WCU:&#039;&#039;&#039; By checking this box, the WCU will validate that the ECU SW version of the task and the actual ECU are the same before starting the task. If they are different, it will not start the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger Expression:&#039;&#039;&#039; The task can be started by an expression. This option lets the user specify start trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). For an explanation of trigger conditions look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sync Signal:&#039;&#039;&#039; It is possible to specify a signal with given values that will be sent when the Area5 task starts and stops. This can be used to synchronize the Area5 read-out with external measurements systems like the M-Log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Audio ==&lt;br /&gt;
An audio task makes it possible to record audio from a connected microphone. An audio recording can be started in five ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger button&#039;&#039;&#039;: to initiate the recording you need to attach a button to the WCU in order to start in the audio recording.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Signal reader&#039;&#039;&#039;: initiate the recording by a trigger expression in a Signal Reader assignment. The recording is started as soon as a Signal Reader &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; is started. You specify the name of the Signal Reader recorder (e.g. SREC_0) you want to start the audio recording. You can also enter &amp;quot;auto&amp;quot; as the recorder name, in which case a recorder that include the Audio_Device_n internal signal will be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039;: Similar to the &#039;Signal reader&#039; trigger option, the &#039;Expression&#039; option lets the user specify start and stop trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). Unlike the &#039;Signal Reader&#039; trigger, there does not have to be a recorder configured in the Signal Reader measurement assignment. For an explanation of triggers look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Audio level&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the trigger once the microphone registers volume above a certain threshold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;: start the recording as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to this, you can set the &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-trig&#039;&#039;&#039; time which is only valid in the cases of trigger button, signal reader, expression and audio level above. As an example, let&#039;s assume the trigger button method is selected. At the moment the trigger button is pressed the audio has already been recorded for the number of seconds specified. This can be handy when you press the trigger button to make a comment about an event where the event was audible.[[File:Skärmavbild 2019-12-18 kl. 14.28.52.png|alt=Audio task|thumb|Audio task]]A maximum &#039;&#039;&#039;duration&#039;&#039;&#039; of the recording can also be set, in seconds from the start trigger event. If there is a stop trigger expression specified, the recording will be stopped either when the stop expression is fulfilled or the max duration is passed, whichever occurs first. If you do not enter a duration it will be set to a default value of 120 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to monitor the audio live. To do this, check the box &amp;quot;Monitoring&amp;quot;. To listen to the live audio you should use a tool such as [http://confero.alkit.se Alkit Confero]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is more information about audio in WICE [[Wice audio|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio tasks can be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Blue piraT ==&lt;br /&gt;
The blue PiraT is a measurement system from Telemotive AG that can be configured with measurement set-ups, and data accessed through the WICE Portal. Note that to use the blue PiraT module, the WCUs to be used need to be preconfigured with a special software package (i.e. an &amp;quot;extra bundle&amp;quot;). Contact Alkit Communications in order to set this up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CAN-recorder ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Canrecorder.png|thumb|Canrecorder]]&lt;br /&gt;
Canrecorder is a measurement module that allows CAN frames to be captured and logged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the grid, select which bus (or buses) to record from. By clicking below active column or select a row and click on “Toggle” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To apply filters on specific CAN buses, select a row and click on “Edit filter”. There it is possible to select one specific frame or several by separating them by “,”. It is also possible to select a range between frames by using “-”. The value can either be decimal or hexadecimal. A example of a filter: “1, 0x12-0xFF”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Below the grid settings for how long the recording should be and how many shots. If not using shot count, infinite result files will be created as long as the units are on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Scheduling=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with version &amp;gt;= 2.53 this task can be scheduled by selecting the &amp;quot;Add schedule&amp;quot;-checkbox. By doing so, the panel shown in Figure &amp;quot;Schedule Panel&amp;quot; appears. By thereafter selecting the &amp;quot;ASAP&amp;quot; checkbox, the task will be performed once and as soon as possible. If instead the task is to be performed at a specified time, deselect the &amp;quot;Time span&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot;-checkboxes and select the sought time in the &amp;quot;Start field&amp;quot;. The task can also be performed within a certain time span, and in this case &amp;quot;Time span&amp;quot; should be checked and the Date in &amp;quot;End&amp;quot; field specified. Repetition of the task is defined by checking the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; checkbox, defining a interval size in the field after &amp;quot;Every&amp;quot; and a recurrence rate in the drop down menu. The task will then be repeated at this rate until the date defined in the &amp;quot;Until&amp;quot; field is reached. By selecting the &amp;quot;On ignition&amp;quot; checkbox, the task will be performed once on ignition. If delay is above 0 then the task will be performed once the configured amount of seconds have passed after ignition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration Schedule.png|thumb|left|600px|Schedule Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scheduling on ignition.png|thumb|300x300px|Schedule Panel with &#039;On ignition&#039; enabled]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To control the time zone in which the task scheduling is to be performed the &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot;-checkbox is used. If this option is deselected, the task will be performed in UTC-time (the date fields present the portal local time). On the other hand, if this box is checked, the task will be performed according to the local time zone predefined for the WCU. A WCU time zone can be defined for a WCU with version &amp;gt;= 2.53 by an administrator using &amp;quot;Edit configuration&amp;quot; in the [[The Portal Administrator View#The Vehicles Tab|Vehicles panel]]. This is useful when there is a need to perform a certain task at a specific time of the day regardless of which country the vehicle is in. For instance, when selecting 100 different WCUs scheduled to perform a task at 10:00, checking the &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot;-checkbox will result in them performing the task according to their time zone setting. Without checking this option, the task will be performed in the corresponding UTC-time, which could mean in the middle of the day or night depending on where the vehicle is located.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) ==&lt;br /&gt;
The DLT functionality comes in two flavors. One is based on communicating with a DLT daemon on the ECU and the other is based on the UDS service 38. From version 2.92.0 the latter is also supported. You switch between the using the button &amp;quot;DLT UDS mode&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DLT Daemon Mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
DLT itself provides a log and trace interface, based on the standardized protocol specified in the AUTOSAR standard 4.0 DLT. A DLT task in the WICE Portal makes it possible to collect such logs in a vehicle where this functionality is available and transfer the data to the WICE portal where logs can be downloaded for further analysis. For a more in-depth description, you can go [https://github.com/GENIVI/dlt-daemon here]. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-dlt-daemon.png|thumb|The DLT new task dialog for the daemon mode.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Basically the WCU is connecting to one or more DLT Daemons and unique filters can be applied to each daemon, filtering out specific log messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So when creating a DLT task on WCUs with software version 2.72.0 or later the number of daemons can be specified and for each daemon the following needs to be specified:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Daemon address - the IP-address in order for the WCUs DLT client to find the daemon.&lt;br /&gt;
# Daemon port - which port on the address the daemon is at.&lt;br /&gt;
# Filter configurations - filter expressions to be applied on the log messages. If left empty no filter is applied. For an explanation on how to write filter expressions, see [https://github.com/GENIVI/dlt-daemon#learn-more here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Older WCUs ====&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with software version earlier than 2.72.0 only one daemon is supported and only filters can be configured when creating a DLT task. To specify the daemon address and port go to the [[DLT Module]] instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DLT UDS Mode ===&lt;br /&gt;
When in this mode the user is presented with a list of directories to handle. Each row in the table is for a specific WCU and directory, as indicated in the illustration for the UDS mode to the right. To add a row, or directory to fetch, press the button &amp;quot;Add transfer&amp;quot;. An editable row shows up in the table where you can enter data. Enter the ECU ID as hexadecimal number, an optional pin code (more on this later) and the directory to fetch. You can add as many entries as you wish.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dlt-uds-task.png|thumb|DLT UDS service 38 task]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is a check box with the text &amp;quot;Use vehicle specific PINs&amp;quot;. By checking the box, the system will try to get a vehicle specific PIN code for each ECU and WCU. How to supply the system with suck PIN codes can be done over here (link to Robins stuff).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ETAS ==&lt;br /&gt;
Through an ETAS task, an ETAS ES720 Drive Recorder system can be configured, and measurement data offloaded and accessed through the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an ETAS task, the task description file you select must be a .exp file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ethernet capture ==&lt;br /&gt;
This kind of task is used to capture packet data from one of the ethernet interfaces on the WCU. The basics for this kind of task is that you choose the interface you would like to capture from and a capture expression to filter which packets you are interested in. The results from this task type is pcap files. To read more about this task type, go [[Ethernet capture|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File fetcher ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:File fetcher proxy example.png|thumb|The new task dialog of the File fetcher task.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The File fetcher task fetches files from a specified unit and makes them available for downloading in the Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following needs to be specified when creating such a task:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;File path&#039;&#039;&#039; - One or several paths to a files or file-containing directories on the unit&#039;s file system. This specifies which files that will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;IP address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Port&#039;&#039;&#039; -  To find the unit. Default is 22, but can be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the task also allows the use of a proxy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use a proxy, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Use Proxy&#039;&#039;&#039; checkbox has to be checked, and the following must be specified:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the proxy unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the proxy unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy IP Address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the proxy unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Proxy Port&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the proxy unit. Default is 22, but can be changed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== IDC ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC) is a measurement module that allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent and responses recorded. The sequence of diagnostic requests can be created as an assignment in the Assignment tab, alternatively can be uploaded to the portal as a text file (usually ending with &amp;quot;.seq&amp;quot;). This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IPEmotion RT ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. From version 2.72 the portal can interact with the logger IPEmotion RT from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The file should have the extension &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.irf&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. When the task is downloaded the WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the IPEmotion RT - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since version 2.79.0 IPEmotion RT tasks can now have software version validation in the same manner as described for the M-Log task (see [[Creating a Task#Software version validation (Available from version 2.74.0)|Software version validation]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LPD ==&lt;br /&gt;
This type of task is ultimately handled by a separate App in an iPhone or iPad. The WICE system simply makes this task available to the App through a REST interface running on the WCU. The task consists of a specially crafted excel file. When the file is uploaded to the WICE portal it is validated to make sure that it can be read by the App.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2023-05-24 16-09-55.png|thumb|View an LPD task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot-edit-lpd.png|thumb|Upload opportunity after pressing the Edit button]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.83.0 of the WICE portal the task measurement file can be updated via the View Task function in the Tasks tab and a dialog as shown to the right will appear. By pressing the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button in the lower right corner, you will be presented with the possibility to upload a new measurement task file. This is shown with a red triangle in the illustration on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M-Log ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. One such logger is called M-Log from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.[[File:MlogForWiki.png|thumb|M-Log task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2022-04-21 09-34-11.png|alt=Entering ECU software version|thumb|Entering ECU software version]]&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the MLOG - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Software version validation (Available from version 2.74.0) ====&lt;br /&gt;
The measurement assignment for an MLOG is created using an external tool to WICE. An assignment is created with a certain version of the ECU software in mind for each ECU in the assignment. In order for the assignment to work it might be important that the ECU software version in the vehicle matches the software version of the ECU it was created for. In WICE, you can ask the system to read the current software version for each ECU which is stored and can be viewed, e.g. via the [[ECU List|ECU list]]. As WICE cannot know which software versions the assignment was created for, the user can supply this to WICE. By doing that, WICE can validate the entered software versions against what has been read out for each vehicle and thus aid the user in making sure that an assignment will work once it will run. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make the validation possible the user enters a ECU by its address, not the name. To help find out the address for an ECU you can go to the [[ECU List|ECU list]] to find the address of a specific ECU. Have a look at the illustration, Entering ECU software version, to see where in the dialog this is entered. On the top you enter the ECU address on the left and what software version is expected on the right. When satisfied, press the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button. The data you just entered will be added to the table and evaluated against what the WICE system has read out from the vehicle. In the example to the right something is incorrect which is indicated by the yellow color. To see the exact reason, simply use the cursor to see the specific message. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A negative validation in not enforced in the sense that you cannot run the assignment but rather an indication that it might not work as expected. You can always go ahead and press &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== MQTT ==&lt;br /&gt;
A MQTT task makes it possible to record data from a MQTT message broker, by specifying a specific topic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rapid prototyping ==&lt;br /&gt;
A Rapid prototyping (RP) task makes it possible to download RP binaries to multiple WCUs and keep track of the result files the RP task might produce. For more information about RP, see [[WICE RP How-To]] and [[WICE RP Manual]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rapid prototyping task.png|thumb|Rapid prototyping task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The rapid prototyping tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Rapid prototyping task&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An RP task must consist of at least an &#039;RP binary&#039; or a &#039;Web application zip file&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SoftHub ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SoftHub is a measurement system that can be run either as a stand alone unit or as a software module on the WCU, with functionality similar to the Signal Reader module. A SoftHub task is created much in the same way as a Signal Reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a SoftHub task, you select a .shub task file, and then proceed in the same way as the Signal Reader task. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SoftHub task will generate result files. It may be interesting to know if certain signals reach certain values in these result files, therefore it is possible to add &#039;&#039;&#039;server triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; to the task that will trigger and add a suitable label to the corresponding result file. Read more about this [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader == &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration SignalReader.png|thumb|271x271px|Signal reader task]]&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader is a data capture module that allows monitoring and logging of CAN and FlexRay signals, as well as diagnostics data, and ECU-internal signals read by CCP or XCP. To create a Signal Reader task you proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. You either select an assignment file of .haf format, or choose an assignment created in the assignment creator (see [[Signal Reader Assignment Wizard]]). Your current choice will be displayed in the &amp;quot;Chosen file&amp;quot; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When you have selected an assignment and one or more WCUs, the CAN buses defined in the assignment and on the WCU will be mapped. If they can be automatically mapped a green check symbol will be displayed, otherwise a red cross will be displayed. Clicking the mapping button will open the mapper. In the pop-up window you will have to map the different buses to each other manually and then save. Once this is done correctly, the red cross will become a green check mark, indicating that the mappings are ready to be automatically applied upon submit. Read more about this in [[I/O configurations]] and [[Mappings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. With a Signal Reader task you can monitor CAN, FlexRay, ODB-II and WCU-internal signals live by selecting &amp;quot;Monitor signals&amp;quot;. When selected, two boxes will appear under the task description. In the left one you search for signals and drag them over to the right one where the signals to be monitored are listed. You can later see the monitored signals by pressing the &#039;&#039;&#039;Monitor Signals&#039;&#039;&#039; button either in the Tasks tab or in the Vehicles tab. It is also possible to copy the signals text in the bottom right corner of the right box. Next to the copy text button you can also paste signals as text where the pasted signal names will be matched against the list of unselected signals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. You can choose if you want the signals to have their data source names as a prefix (e.g. CAN1.EngineSpeed instead of EngineSpeed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. The Signal Reader task will generate result files. It may be interesting to know if certain signals reach certain values in these result files, therefore it is possible to add &#039;&#039;&#039;Server Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; to the assignment that will trigger and add a suitable label to the corresponding result file. Read more about this [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Signal reader task can be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Signal Broker === &lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader can act as a Signal Broker for other software components. For instance, the audio and video modules relies on the Signal Broker API of Signal Reader for evaluating start and stop trigger expressions. Moreover, the Signal Broker gives programmatical access to signals for Rapid Prototyping tasks.  Read more about this in [[WICE Signal Broker API]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Files containing references to sequence files === &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SequenceFileForSignalreader.png|thumb|right|Sequence Files References in .haf File]] &lt;br /&gt;
If the measurement file contains references to sequence files, you are also required to select these in order to run the task. The portal scans the .haf file for such entries and presents this to you, see illustration 4.2. Click the button for each sequence file reference to upload each sequence file needed. Some requests in the sequence file may be for reading DTCs, and in such cases you can select the option of also reading associated &#039;&#039;Snapshots&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;. An example of this can found in Figure &amp;quot;Sequence Files References in .haf File&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SequenceFilesForSignalreaderWithFunctionalQuery.png|thumb|right|Sequence File with Functional Query]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the .haf file contained two references to sequence files. As no sequence files have yet been uploaded, the selection for reading snapshot or extended data is grayed out. In Figure &amp;quot;Sequence File with Functional Query&amp;quot; we have selected one such sequence file containing (functional) DTC requests. Here we have checked that we would like to read &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;. It is also possible to select both &#039;&#039;Snapshots&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WICE internal signals ===&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to CAN and FlexRay signals, a number of internal signals (i.e. internal to the WCU) are also available. The following WICE-internal signals are supported: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SoH ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-43-34.png|thumb|799x799px|SoH]]&lt;br /&gt;
A State of Health (SoH) task collects specific status information from vehicles. You select which information you want the task to collect by filling in one or more of the checkboxes shown in Figure &amp;quot;SoH&amp;quot;. The number of checkboxes shown can vary depending on the WICE installation. In order for SoH data to be correctly interpreted, relevant description files (e.g. SDDB) for the vehicles executing the SoH task may have to been available. To add such a description file for a vehicle, see [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog|The Edit Car Dialog]].The six different options are:&lt;br /&gt;
*Mileage&lt;br /&gt;
*Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
*Read ECU software numbers&lt;br /&gt;
*Read ECU DTC:s (optionally including &#039;Snapshot&#039; and &#039;Extended data&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
*Read OBD-II PIDs&lt;br /&gt;
*App Diagnotstic Db Part Num&lt;br /&gt;
*DM1, Diagnostic Message using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Odometer, reading the odometer using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]] (available from WCU version 2.63)&lt;br /&gt;
*Clear DTCs. &lt;br /&gt;
**If reading DTCs is requested as well, those will be read before clearing the DTCs. (available from WCU version 2.63)&lt;br /&gt;
**If this option (Clear DTC) is chosen it is optionally possible to set a PIN code for unlocking a gateway module - e.g. Vehicle Gateway Module (VGM). (Available from WCU version 2.66)&lt;br /&gt;
*Engine hours, reading engine hours using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]] (available from WCU version 2.64). The result for this can be read in the generated j1939-file from the task. It is a text type of file. In addition, a system value label called &#039;engine_hours&#039; (as default, can be changed on a customer basis). This label shows the latest read value and is available on the vehicle.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some selections above might not be available to you as this is a configuration setting depending on customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SWDL ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Swdl task Screenshot from 2023-06-28 14-50-55.png|thumb|791x791px|New SWDL task]]&lt;br /&gt;
A Software Download (SWDL) task updates the ECU software in one or more ECUs in one or more vehicles. A number of Versatile Binary Format (VBF) files containing the ECU software need to be supplied, along with PIN codes to allow security access to re-program the ECUs. The PIN codes should be in the format of five hexadecimal numbers, e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ff:00:1a:2c:77&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or alternatively, omitting the colon separator, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ff001a2c77&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;). When a SWDL task has been created and assigned to one or more WCUs, it will cause all vbf files to be downloaded to the WCUs, and then the actual re-programming can be triggered by the vehicle user through the WCU status GUI web interface. The uploaded vbf-files are presented in a table along with its ECU and software part type (SW part type). In a separate table, the PIN codes for each ECU are presented along with the total number of files uploaded per WCU, see Figure &amp;quot;New SWDL task&amp;quot;. To get an overview of how the files relate to the ECUs it is possible to choose the &amp;quot;Group by&amp;quot;-option when right clicking the ECU column in the file table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include a &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-update sequence file and/or a post-update sequence file&#039;&#039;&#039;. The diagnostic requests of those sequence files will be sent before and after the ECU re-programming respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include one &#039;&#039;&#039;signature file&#039;&#039;&#039; (containing checksums). The file is assumed to be an xml file. (Available from WCU version 2.66) If either of the optional files is selected, a field will appear to the right of the chosen file. This field will contain the name of the chosen file. (Available from WCU version 2.70)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include a &#039;&#039;&#039;VGM unlock&#039;&#039;&#039; access control mechanism, with a PIN code for the VGM node. This is specifically for vehicles requiring this kind of access control for ECU re-programming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By checking the box &#039;&#039;&#039;Run SoH after completion&#039;&#039;&#039; it is possible to let the SWDL task run the WCUs SoH task after the SWDL task is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like to use any individual ECU pin codes for a vehicle, make sure to check the box &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Vehicle Pin mappings&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. If a pin code for the ECU targeted by a vbf file, the pin code for the vehicle will be used. If no such pin code is found, the one entered in the right hand side table is used. Read more on how to prepare a vehicle with pin codes [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger Expression&#039;&#039;&#039; which must be fulfilled within a specified time limit (&amp;quot;Wait time&amp;quot;) for ECU re-programming to be allowed. The trigger expression follows the same syntax as Signal Reader trigger expressions (or [[Server Trigger|Server Triggers]], audio/video triggers), and should be built up from signals being measured in a Signal Reader assignment. The user must make sure that there is a Signal Reader assignment on the WCUs of the SWDL task, with the signals of the trigger expression being measured.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to choose to &#039;&#039;&#039;ignore checksums&#039;&#039;&#039; and/or &#039;&#039;&#039;disable pre-programming&#039;&#039;&#039; using the corresponding checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SWDL module can be [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Software Download Module|configured]] to perform SWDL either over CAN or over Ethernet (DoIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
A video task makes it possible to record and monitor live video from one or two cameras attached to a WCU. You can trigger recording of video in four ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger button&#039;&#039;&#039;: To initiate the recording you need to attach a button to the WCU in order to start in the video recording.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Signal reader&#039;&#039;&#039;: Initiate the recording when a recorder in a Signal Reader assignment starts. The recording is started as soon as a Signal Reader &#039;&#039;recorder&#039;&#039; is started. You specify the name of the Signal Reader recorder (e.g. SREC_0) you want to start the video recording. You can also enter &amp;quot;auto&amp;quot; as the recorder name, in which case a recorder that include the Video_Device_n internal signal will be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039;: Similar to the &#039;Signal reader&#039; trigger option, the &#039;Expression&#039; option lets the user specify start and stop trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). Unlike the &#039;Signal Reader&#039; trigger, there does not have to be a recorder configured in the Signal Reader measurement assignment. For an explanation of how to enter triggers, have a look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;: start the recording as soon as possible. (Use this with caution, since it tends to produce prohibitively large video files.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to this, you can set the &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-trig&#039;&#039;&#039; time (not valid in the cases of the &#039;None&#039; trigger option above). As an example, let&#039;s assume the trigger button method is selected. At the moment the trigger button is pressed the video has already been recorded for the number of seconds specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A maximum &#039;&#039;&#039;duration&#039;&#039;&#039; of the recording can also be set, in seconds from the start trigger event. If there is a stop trigger expression specified, the recording will be stopped either when the stop expression is fulfilled or the max duration is passed, whichever occurs first. If you do not enter a duration it will be set to a default value of 120 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If monitoring of video from a WCU is enabled, a live video stream will be transmitted which can be viewed using a RTP-based video tool, for instance [http://confero.alkit.se Alkit Confero]. This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about the video support in WICE [[WICE_video|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applicable for all types ==&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled at your site, there might be an opportunity to announce to third party applications that a result file is available using a [[wikipedia:Jakarta_Messaging|JMS API]]. By checking this box, as soon as a result file is added in the back-end this will be signaled using a customer specific event. The check box title is &amp;quot;Announce result file availability&amp;quot;, this can be seen in the image in [[#SoH|SoH]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Site specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Announce result file availability ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Resultfilepanel.png|thumb|Announced On column]]&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled at your site, there might be an opportunity to announce to third party applications that a result file is available using a [[wikipedia:Jakarta_Messaging|JMS API]]. By checking this box, as soon as a result file is added in the back-end this will be signaled using a customer specific event. The check box title is &amp;quot;Announce result file availability&amp;quot;, this can be seen in the image in [[#SoH|SoH]]. Starting from version 2.87.0, there&#039;s a new &#039;Announced On&#039; column that keeps track of when the result file was announced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Retention time ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Retention time.png|thumb|435x435px|Retention time]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works by setting a retention time in days which simply says that data coming in from the task, i.e. result files and positions will be kept the set number of days from when the data was collected. If, e.g. setting the retention time for an task to 30 days, will keep data until it is 30 days old where it will be automatically removed. See image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to set a default retention time for resource groups. To do this, add a global value label named &#039;&#039;&#039;RETENTION_TIME&#039;&#039;&#039; to the resource group and give it an appropriate value. This value will then be used as a template value when creating a new task for this resource group. If multiple resource groups have this label and they have different values, the one with the lowest/shortest retention time value will be chosen as the template value.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Dlt-uds-task.png&amp;diff=3765</id>
		<title>File:Dlt-uds-task.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Dlt-uds-task.png&amp;diff=3765"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T09:42:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;A view of the DLT UDS task.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:New-dlt-daemon.png&amp;diff=3764</id>
		<title>File:New-dlt-daemon.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:New-dlt-daemon.png&amp;diff=3764"/>
		<updated>2024-12-13T09:17:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;New screenshot&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3762</id>
		<title>New features in v2.92</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3762"/>
		<updated>2024-12-12T15:13:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for WiFi on platform HMX/V2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
In version 2.92, we have added support for WiFi on the HMX/V2 platform in the WCU configuration panel. To access the WiFi settings, the WCU must be running at least version 2.92.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for ICCID in the WCU history panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
ICCID is now available in the WCU history panel, enabling users to see which SIM card is installed in the WCU. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice292/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Limited Remote Logon ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to specify a time limit (in hours) for the remote logon configuration. If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch uploaded Vehicle PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to fetch PINs for HIA, HIB and Diagnostic firewall disable in the IO-tab of the WCU configuration panel. The PINs will be automatically applied to the corresponding fields if available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only PINs that have been uploaded via &#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039; in the vehicles-tab with the correct service area will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requires WCU version 2.89.0 or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal reader assignments support DREC with IDC assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment editor now with permissions for edit and remove assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for UDS service 38 for task type DLT ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to get ECU logs using service 38 in addition to using the DLT daemon for DLT tasks.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3760</id>
		<title>New features in v2.92</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3760"/>
		<updated>2024-12-12T12:08:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for ICCID in WCU history panel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for WiFi on platform HMX/V2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
In version 2.92, we have added support for WiFi on the HMX/V2 platform in the WCU configuration panel. To access the WiFi settings, the WCU must be running at least version 2.92.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for ICCID in the WCU history panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
ICCID is now available in the WCU history panel, enabling users to see which SIM card is installed in the WCU. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice292/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Limited Remote Logon ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to specify a time limit (in hours) for the remote logon configuration. If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch uploaded Vehicle PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to fetch PINs for HIA, HIB and Diagnostic firewall disable in the IO-tab of the WCU configuration panel. The PINs will be automatically applied to the corresponding fields if available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only PINs that have been uploaded via &#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039; in the vehicles-tab with the correct service area will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requires WCU version 2.89.0 or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal reader assignments support DREC with IDC assignments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment editor now with permissions for edit and remove assignments ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3758</id>
		<title>New features in v2.92</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.92&amp;diff=3758"/>
		<updated>2024-12-12T12:01:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: /* Support for WiFi on platform HMX V2 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for WiFi on platform HMX/V2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
In version 2.92, we have added support for WiFi on the HMX/V2 platform in the WCU configuration panel. To access the WiFi settings, the WCU must be running at least version 2.92.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for ICCID in WCU history panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
ICCID is now available in the WCU history panel, enabling users to see which SIM card is installed in the WCU. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice292/index.php/Vehicles#Right_click_context_menu here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Limited Remote Logon ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to specify a time limit (in hours) for the remote logon configuration. If specified, the remote logon configuration will be automatically disabled after the limit has expired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the portal setup, the following modes are possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* None - not possible to specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional - the user may specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
* Required - the user must specify a time limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fetch uploaded Vehicle PINs ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to fetch PINs for HIA, HIB and Diagnostic firewall disable in the IO-tab of the WCU configuration panel. The PINs will be automatically applied to the corresponding fields if available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only PINs that have been uploaded via &#039;Upload Vehicle PINs&#039; in the vehicles-tab with the correct service area will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Requires WCU version 2.89.0 or higher.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_task&amp;diff=3741</id>
		<title>New task</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_task&amp;diff=3741"/>
		<updated>2024-11-07T10:18:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jonas: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;= New task =&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;The following applies to version &amp;gt;= 2.41 of the portal:&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New Task Window.png|thumb|New Task Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddResourcesButton.png|thumb|Add Resources to Task]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ShowResourcesButton.png|thumb|Show Resources Button]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ValidationResourceWindow.png|thumb|Resource Validation Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new task, first select task type in the window presented in Figure &amp;quot;New Task Window&amp;quot;. Learn more about how to go about creating a new task [[Creating a Task|here]]. When a task is chosen, you can select target WCUs for the task by clicking the &amp;quot;Add resources&amp;quot;-button, presented in Figure &amp;quot;Add Resources to Task&amp;quot;. As the illustration shows, the area where WCU&#039;s where added and removed to the task is a table very similar to the that in the Vehicles tab.&lt;br /&gt;
This table shows the currently added WCUs that the chosen task will be added to. Clicking &amp;quot;Add resources&amp;quot; the window shown in Figure &amp;quot;Select Resources Window&amp;quot; will open up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New task 2.png|thumb|Resource Selection Window]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The select resources window contains two tables. The upper table has filter editors where one enters search criteria and performs a search by pressing enter or clicks the &amp;quot;Search&amp;quot; button. The lower table shows the selected resources (WCUs) and is connected to the table shown in Figure &amp;quot;Add Resources to Task&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add/remove resources==&lt;br /&gt;
To add content to the table of selected resources you can select the a WCU and then either click on the &amp;quot;arrow down&amp;quot; button located between the two tables or drag and drop the selected WCUs. It is also possible to add a single WCU by double clicking it.&lt;br /&gt;
To remove content from the table of selected resources you can select the WCUs you want to remove and then click the &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; button next to the &amp;quot;arrow down&amp;quot; button. You can also remove a single WCU by clicking the red &amp;quot;Remove record&amp;quot; icon in the end of each line in the table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are happy with the selected resources, click &amp;quot;Done&amp;quot; and the content will be added to the table shown in Figure &amp;quot;Add Resources to Task&amp;quot;. If you click cancel, the content will not be added and you will have to add the WCUs again by reopen the Select resources window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Incompatible resources==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New task 3.png|thumb|frame|Incompatible Resources]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you add a WCU and return to the New task window you can end up with having one or more lines, in the selected WCUs table, with red background. This means that the WCU does not have the current tool installed. An example of this can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Incompatible Resources&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add resources from the Search- and Vehicles tab==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New task 5.png|thumb|frame|Add WCUs from Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New task 6.png|thumb|frame|Select All by CTRL+A]]&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of adding WCUs by the method shown above, it is also possible to select one or more records in the Search/Vehicles table in the corresponding tabs and then click &amp;quot;New Task&amp;quot;. Any selected WCU will then by added to the table of selected WCUs. An example can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Add WCUs from Vehicles Tab&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting WCUs in the Search/Vehicles tab it is possible to select all visible WCUs by pressing Ctrl+A. To select even non visible WCUs (when your search criteria matches more results than the standard fetch of 50 results) you press Ctrl+A two times in a row. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note!&#039;&#039;&#039; Internet Explorer has some problems to correctly report keys down when two keys are pressed and when the result table in Vehicles has the focus. To come around this (and use the double CTRL+A feature) click outside the table and then press CTRL+A twice. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A illustration showing what it looks like when CTRL+A is pressed twice and even non-fetched WCUs are selected can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Select All by CTRL+A&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== View the validation reasons for each WCU within a resource group when creating a task ==&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 2.91.0, users can now view the validation status of each WCU within a resource group when creating a task. To access this feature, simply click the &#039;Show Resources&#039; button or double-click the row (Figure &amp;quot;Add Resources to Task&amp;quot;). This will open a new validation window displaying the status of each individual WCU (Figure &amp;quot;Validation Resource Window&amp;quot;). If any WCU&#039;s status is not &#039;Ok,&#039; users can hover over the WCU to see a detailed description of the issue. In the bottom left corner, you&#039;ll also find statistics indicating how many WCUs have the statuses of &#039;OK,&#039; &#039;Warning,&#039; and &#039;Error. In the bottom right corner, you&#039;ll find a copy button. When pressed, this button opens a new window displaying the table in text format, making it easier for users to copy any data.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jonas</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>